Marantz AV8003 User Guide

AV Pre Tuner

AV8003

ENGLISHFRANÇAIS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK) NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED

SERVICE PERSONNEL

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufﬁ cient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

NOTE:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

NOTE:

Changes or modiﬁ cations may cause this unit to fail to comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and may void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Cet appareil numerique de la Classe B est conforme a la norme NMB-003 du Canada.

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG

TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION:

POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU’AU FOND.

NOTE TO CATV SYSTEM INSTALLER:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV (Cable-TV) system installer’s attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, speciﬁ es that the cable g round shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

U.S. Responsible Party: Marantz America, Inc.

100 Corporate Drive, Mahwah, NJ, 07430, U.S.A. TEL: 201-7

Type of Product: Model:

62-6500

AV Pre Tuner AV8003

IMPORTANT SAFETY

INSTRUCTIONS

READ BEFORE OPERATING EQUIPMENT

This product was designed and manufactured to meet strict quality and safety standards . There are, however, some installation and operation precautions which you should be particularly aware of.

1. Read these instructions.

2. Keep these instructions.

3. Heed all warnings.

4. Follow all instructions.

5. Do not use this apparatus near water.

6. Clean only with dry cloth.

7. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacture's instructions.

8. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including ampliﬁ ers) that produce heat.

9. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not ﬁ t into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

Additional Safety Information!

• This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

• Apparatus shall not be exposed to dripping or splashing and that no objects ﬁ lled with liquids, such as vases, shall be placed on the apparatus.

• When the switch is in the OFF position, the apparatus isn’t completely switched-off from the MAINS.

• The equipment shall be installed near the power supply so that the power supply is easily accessible.

• Do not touch hot spots during and immediately after use.

• During and immediately after use, this product is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

• Do not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, ﬁ re or the like.

10. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus.

11. Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁ ed by the manufacturer.

12. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table speciﬁ ed by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over.

13. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time.

14. Refer all servicing to qualiﬁ ed service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped.

AV_071203U2

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing the Marantz AV8003 AV Pre tuner. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide you with many years of home theater enjo yment. Please take a f ew minutes to read this man ual thoroughly before you connect and operate the AV8003. As there are a number of connection and conﬁ guration options, you are encouraged to discuss your own particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V specialist dealer.

ACCESSORIES CHECK

Before use, check the below accessories were included in the package.

ENGLISH

Remote Controller RC2001

AAA-size Alkaline batteries × 4

Remote Controller RC101 for Zone

AAA-size Dry batteries × 2

Microphone

FM Antenna converter

USB cable for RC2001

AC power cable

AV8003 User Guide

AV8003 NETWORK User Guide

AM Loop Antenna

FM Feeder Antenna

Wizz.it3 User Guide

Warranty Card

USA × 1 Canada × 1

1

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ....................................1

ACCESSORIES CHECK ....................................................1

TABLE OF CONTENTS .........................2

CONNECTIONS SETUP

FEA TURES .............................................2

BEFORE USE .........................................3

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER ......................4

NAMES AND FUNCTION ......................5

FRONT PANEL ...................................................................5

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER ...........................................6

REAR PANEL .....................................................................7

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC2001 ....................................8

RC2001 LCD INDICATORS ...............................................8

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC101 ......................................9

BASIC

CONNECTIONS ...................................10

SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................10

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (BALANCED) ...............11

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (UNBALANCED) .......... 11

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS ..........................12

ADVANCED

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS ..........................13

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS ............................14

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS .........15

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS .................16

CONNECTING THE SATELLITE RADIO ........................17

REMOTE

CONNECTING FOR THE ZONE .....................................18

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION)

CONNECTIONS WITH NETWORK DEVICES ................20

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT .............................20

SETUP ..................................................21

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM .........................21

1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................23

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP ..........................................26

ERROR MESSAGES .......................................................29

3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................32

4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................34

5 PREFERENCE ............................................................35

6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................37

7 NETWORK SETUP ......................................................38

2

BASIC OPERATION ............................39

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE ...................................39

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE ...........................39

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE .....................39

NIGHT MODE ...................................................................39

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................40

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL ..

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................40

USING THE SLEEP TIMER .............................................40

M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander) ...................40

VIDEO CONVERT ............................................................40

CONPONENT I/P .............................................................41

HDMI RESOLUTION ........................................................41

SURROUND MODE .............................41

ADVANCED OPERATION ....................45

DISPLAY MODE ...............................................................45

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE .............................45

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUT ..............................................................................45

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

..15

..19

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................46

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................46

7.1 CH INPUT ...................................................................46

AUX INPUT .......................................................................47

VIDEO ON/OFF ................................................................47

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION ........................................47

LIP.SYNC ..........................................................................47

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY ...............................................47

TUNER OPERATION ...........................48

TO SELECTING THE TUNER .........................................48

LISTENING TO THE TUNER ...........................................48

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................49

FOR LISTENING TO HD Radio STATIONS ...................52

RBDS OPERATION ..........................................................54

XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................55

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO ..........................56

SEARCH MODE ...............................................................57

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................58

.........................45

SIRIUS RADIO OVERVIEW .............................................60

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO ...................60

SEARCH MODE ...............................................................62

PRESET MEMORY ..........................................................63

PARENTAL LOCK .............................................................64

ZONE SYSTEM ....................................66

40

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT TERMINALS

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE SURROUND BACK

PREOUT TERMINALS .....................................................66

CONTROLLING THE ZONE FUNCTION FROM

ANOTHER ZONE .............................................................67

REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC2001 TO THE UNIT ..69

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................72

CONTROLLING ZONES USING THE RC2001 ..............80

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................82

MAIN MENU .....................................................................82

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT ....89

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................89

BASIC OPERATION .........................................................92

OTHER OPERATIONS.....................................................94

SETUP CODES (RC101) .................................................95

TROUBLESHOOTING .........................97

HDMI .................................................................................98

XM SATELLITE RADIO ....................................................98

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO .............................................98

HD Radio RECEPTION ....................................................98

OTHERS .............................................100

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ....................................100

DESCRIPTION ...............................................................101

...66

..69

FEATURES

This unit incorporates the latest generation of digital surround sound decoding technology such as Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1 and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby ProLogic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-Logic IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music and Mono). Additionally , the unit is compatible with Dolb y TrueHD and DTS-HD (as used for Blu-ray and HD D VD discs) as well as Dolby Digital Plus, an expanded and improved version of Dolby Digital positioned as the next-generation delivery format. These audio formats can be sent with video signals via an HDMI cable to HDMI 1.3a-compatible equipment. In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-232C communication port, the unit is tomorrow’s technology, today!

• THX ultra 2 certiﬁ ed

This unit incorporates the most advanced Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a 192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of the 7 channels. Independent power supply circuits are incorporated for the FL display, audio and video sections for maximum separation, clarity and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected customized components, all elements work in harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the artist had intended.

This unit is designed and engineered with extensive feedback from custom installation experts, dealers and consumers. It features zone/multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C communication port, Flasher input and an extensive array of both analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable digital inputs, 4 component inputs, Super Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs, video convert system and OSD output versatility is taken to a stunning new level. Furthermore, the unit can output the OSD information through the Y/C (Svideo) and composite video outputs.

An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote controller allows full access to all of the operating functions and can be used for system operation as well.

The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of the unit, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed. This unit is here to perform in your unrivaled home entertainment setup.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

• HDMI

HDMI (High-Deﬁ nition Multimedia Interface) is an enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting audio signals in addition to video signals. Where multiple cables were previously needed for audio/ video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a single cable. The HDMI input jacks of this unit support HDMI Ver.

1.3a. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter support HDMI V er. 1.3a.

Copyright Protection

This unit supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection technology that consists of data encoding and other device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital video content. Both this unit and the connected component (such as a video player or monitor) must support HDCP. Before connecting a component to this unit, refer to its instruction manual.

• x.v.Color

• Deep Color 36bit

• THX / THX Surround EX

• Dolby True HD, Dolby Digital Plus, dts HD

• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)

• Dolby Headphone

• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)

• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)

• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)

• HDCD

• Balanced Preout Terminal

• Balanced CD/CDR input terminal

• Bi-amp Pre out

• Source/Pure Direct mode

• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ

• DSD to PCM converter

• Massive Energy P ower Supply

• Troidal Core Transformer

• Function Rename

• 192 kHz/24 bit DA C for all 8 Channels

• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets

• Auto Input Signal Detection

• Zone B output

• Up-scaling to full HD HDMI out from analog video (480i/480p/576i/576p)

• Video Off Mode

•

Set Up Menu via all Video Output (Composite, S-Video, Component video and HDMI)

• Video convert system

HDMI ← Component Video ↔ S-Video ↔ Composit Video

• Two component monitor outputs

• Video I/P Converter

• Selectable Zone Component Video output

• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System Control

• Emitter Output

• Programmable, learning remote controller

• Customize RC2001 by using Wizz.it3 software

• Flasher Input

• IR Recever Input

• Allows playback of music, photos, and movies stored on a network device.

BEFORE USE

This section must be read before any connection is made to the mains supply.

EQUIPMENT MAINS WORKING SETTING

Your Marantz product has been prepared to comply with the household power and safety requirements that exist in your area. AV8003 can be po w ered by 120V AC only .

COPYRIGHT

Recording and playback of any material may require consent. For fur ther information refer to the following:

— Copyright Act 1956 — Dramatic and Musical Performers Act 1958 — Performers Protection Acts 1963 and 1972 —

Any subsequent statutory enactments and orders

DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES

To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the unit where:

• Exposed to direct sunlight.

• Near to sources of heat such as heaters.

• Highly humid or poorly ventilated.

• Dusty.

• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.

•

On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable surfaces

• Radiated heat is blocked such as in cramped audio racks.

• Make a space of about 8 inchs (0.2 m) around the unit.

To ensure proper heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from walls and other equipment.

KEEP OBJECTS OFF

Keep objects off the unit. Bloc king the vent can result in accident and damage.

DO NOT TOUCH HOT SPOTS DURING AND IMMEDIATELY AFTER USE

During and immediately after use, the unit is hot in areas other than the controls and rear panel connection jacks. Do not touch hot spots and especially the top panel. Contact with hot areas can cause burns.

Opening and closing the front panel door

When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. K eep the door closed when not using these controls.

Caution:

• Be careful not to pinch your ﬁ ngers between the door and the panel.

• Audyssey MultEQ

• M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

• XM Satellite Radio Ready

®

• XM

HD Surround Powered by Neural Audio

• SIRIUS Satellite Radio Ready

• HD Radio

• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets

• Auto Adjust Function for Speaker Distance Settings (Delay Time)

• Assignable DC Trigger Output

• Assignable Video Input

• Auto Lipsync (Audio Delay)

Left

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

Above 8 inchs (0.2 m) or more

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

UP

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

Right

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

Rear

8 inchs (0.2 m)

or more

3

ENGLISH

OPERATION OF REMOTE CONTROLLER

REMOTE CONTROL

Operate the remote controller within a distance of approx. 16.4 ft. (5m) from the infrared receptor window on the front of the unit.

Approx. 16.4 ft. (5 m)

60°

Remote controller

Caution:

• Do not allow direct sunlight, an inverter ﬂ uorescent light or other strong source of light to shine onto the unit’s infrared receptor window. Otherwise, the operation of the remote controller may be disabled.

• Bear in mind that operating the remote controller may cause other devices operated b y infrared ra ys to be operated by mistake.

• The remote controller cannot be operated if the space between the controller and the unit’s infrared receptor window is obstructed.

• Do not place any objects on top of the remote controller.

Doing so may cause one or more buttons to be

held down which will cause the batteries to run down.

LOADING BATTERIES

Before using the remote controller for the ﬁ rst time, load the batteries in the remote controller. The batteries provided are used to verify the operations of the remote controller only.

Remove the back cover.

1.

2. Inser t the new alkaline batteries (AAA type) with correct ª and · polarity.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

Rechargeable batteries can also be used. In this

case, be sure to use only AAA type NiMH (Nickel Metal Hydride) rechargeable batteries. When using rechargeable batteries, be sure to follow manufacturer guidelines for safety and proper usage.

• When the batteries are almost worn out, “LOW” is displayed on the LCD battery indicator.

• The settings remain saved in the remote controller even if the power completely runs out. However, the time setting will be lost, and so please set the time setting again.

<RC101>

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct

ª and · polarity.

CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES

• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote controller.

• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.

• If the remote controller does not operate from close to the unit, replace the batteries with new ones, even if less then a y ear has passed.

• The included battery is only for verifying operation. Replace it with a new battery as soon as possible.

• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in the proper direction, following the + and - marks in the remote controller’s battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or battery ﬂ uid leakage:

- Do not use a new battery with an old one.

- Do not use two different types of batteries.

- Do not shor t-circuit, disassemble, heat or

dispose of batteries in ﬂ ames.

• Remove the batteries when not planning to use the remote controller for a long period of time.

• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the ﬂ uid from the inside of the battery compar tment, then insert new batteries.

• When disposing of used batter ies, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction’s rules that apply in your country or area.

3. Close the battery cover until it clicks shut.

Notes:

• Under normal usage, alkaline batteries last approximately 3 months.

The battery life varies depending on the frequency

of use and the remote controller settings. F requent use will wear down the batteries quicker.

Note:

• The life of the batteries used with the remote controller is about 4 months with normal use.

4

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRE CT

POWER ON/ STANDBY

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

NAMES AND FUNCTION

FRONT PANEL

q tyu i o !0 !1 !3!4r!2 !5ew

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/STANDBY

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

q POWER switc h and STANDBY

indicator

When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be illuminated.

w INPUT SELECTOR knob

(AUDIO/ VIDEO)

This knob is used to select the input sources. (See page 39)

e SURROUND MODE button

Press this button to select the surround mode.

r AUTO (Auto surround) button

Press this button to select the AUTO mode from the surround modes. When this mode is selected, the unit determines the surround mode corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

MENU

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

ENTER

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MO DE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

t

PURE DIRECT button and indicator

DISPLAY

M-DAX

!7!8@0@1@3 !9@2

!6

When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed again,

“PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds, the FL display indication goes out. In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control circuitry and bass management are bypassed.

Notes:

• The surround mode is automatically switched to AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.

• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed automatically as follows.

Front SPKR = LARGE Center SPKR = LARGE Surround SPKR = LARGE Surround Back SPKR = LARGE Sub woofer = YES

y ZONE button

Press this button to activate the Zone system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display. (See page 66)

u ZONE SPEAKER button

Press this button to activate the Zone Speaker system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.

(See page 66)

i MENU button

Press this button to enter the SETUP MAIN MENU.

o EXIT button

Press this button to exit from the SETUP MAIN MENU.

!0 BAND button

Press this button to switch between FM, AM, XM (XM Ready) and SIRIUS (SIRIUS Ready) in the TUNER mode.

!1 T-MODE button

Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode. (See page 49)

!2

INFRARED receiving sensor window

This window receives infrared signals for the remote controller.

!3 MEMORY button

Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory numbers or station names. (See page 49)

!4 CLEAR button

Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 50)

!5 VOLUME contr ol knob

This knob is used to adjust the overall sound level. Turning the control clockwise increases the sound level.

!6 DISPLAY button

Press this button to change the FL display mode.

!7 M-DAX button

Press this button to select M-DAX processing for input source. (See page 40)

!8

TOP button

Press this button to return to the top screen of the main menu when conﬁ guring setup items. (See page 21) Also, press this button to return to the top screen of the network when using the network.

!9

Cursor (

Press these buttons to operate the SETUP MAIN MENU, NETWORK and TUNER function.

5, ∞, 2, 3

) / ENTER button

@0 7.1CH INPUT button

Press this button to select the output of an external multichannel player.

@1 MIC jack

Automatically measure speaker characteristics using the included microphone. (See page 27)

@2 THX button

Press this button to select THX processing for input source.

@3

HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

5

ENGLISH

M-DAX

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER

s

g

SURR

¡9 ¡7 ¡5™0 ¡6

CONNECTIONS

M-DAX

™1

a

DISP MULTI AUTO TUNED ST V – OFF NIGHT PEAK ANALOG

SLEEP

AUTO

a DISP (Display Off) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the

SETUP

display off mode.

s SLEEP timer indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer function in the main-zone is in use.

OPERATION

BASIC

d MULTI (Zone system) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the zone system is active.

f AUTO SURR

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(Auto Surround mode) indicator

This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO SURROUND mode is in use.

g TUNER’s indicators

AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the TUNED : This indicator illuminates when the

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an

TROUBLESHOOTING

h

DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)

These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).

tuner’s Auto mode is in use. tuner receives a sufﬁ ciently strong

radio signal. FM station is being tuned into stereo

condition.

j V (video)-OFF mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF function is active.

OTHERS

k NIGHT mode indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of digital program material at low volume levels.

h k l ¡1 ¡3f

j ¡0

DISC 6.1 DIRECT MTX 6.1

¡8

ATT

EQ

¡2

DIGITAL

PCM

¡4d

SURROUND

DIGITAL

L C R

LFE

SL S SR

l PEAK indicator

This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable lev el of internal processing, this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press the ATT button. (See page 70)

¡0 EQ indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the EQ MODE is selected to “AUDDYSSEY”, “FRONT” or “FLAT”.

¡1 ATT (Attenuation) indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation function is active.

¡2 DIGITAL Input Indicator

This indicator is illuminated when a digital input has been selected.

¡3 ANALOG input indicator

This indicator is illuminated when an analog input source has been selected.

¡4 SIGNAL FORMAT indicators

2 DIGITAL This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital signal is input.

EX

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX signal is input.

dts

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is input.

ES

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal is input.

96/24

This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal is input.

PCM

This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is PCM (pulse code modulation).

2 SURROUND

This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround signal is input.

¡5 HDMI indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDMI device is connected to the unit.

¡6

ENCODED CHANNEL STA TUS indicator s

These indicators display the channels that are encoded with a digital input signal. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is 7.1 channel PCM-audio. “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “ SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated. If the digital input signal is Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX ﬂ ag or DTS-ES, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” , “SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.

Note:

When the unit is decoding Dolby TrueHD, the input signal status displayed depends on the number of channels of the speakers used. If a 7.1-channel signal is supplied for a 5.1-channel speaker system (L/C/R/SL/SR/SW), the “S” indicator is not illuminated.

¡7 HDCD indicator

This indicator is illuminated when the HDCD signal is decoded from digital input signal.

¡8 Main Information Display

This display shows messages relating to the status, input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or other aspects of unit’s operation.

¡9 DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the SOURCE DIRECT mode. PURE DIRECT mode or

7.1ch input mode.

™0 M-DAX indicator

This indicator illuminates when this unit is in the MDAX mode.

™1 PURE DIRECT indicator

This indicator is illuminated when this unit is in the PURE DIRECT mode.

6

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

SW

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

REAR PANEL

q w t y

(

)

(

)

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

INPUT 4

DSS

)

OUTPUT 1

VCR1

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

ININOUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

FLASHER

IN

2

CD/CDR

ZONE OUT

OUT

AAB

IN

@6 @5

@4

@3

INPUT 1

TV

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

INPUT 1

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

TV

DVD

L

R

COMPONENT

)

(

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

IN

ININOUT

6

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

IN

INPUT 3

C

B

Y

/

P

VIDEO

B

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

e@0

q FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)

Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial cable, or a cable network FM source.

AM antenna and ground terminals

Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the best reception.

w COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/

OUTPUT

If your DVD player or other device has component video connectors, be sure to connect them to these component video connectors on the unit. This unit has 4 component video input connectors to obtain the color information (Y, C recorded DVD signal or other video component and two component video outputs connector to output it directly into the matrix decoder of the display device. By sending the pure DVD component video signal directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing that normally would degrade the image. The result is vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like colors and crisp detail. The Monitor Out 2 terminal is also used for ZONE output.

B

, CR) directly from the

C

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

3

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

R

)

re

L

R

OUT PUT

1

/

P

R

)

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

L

R

(

)

AUX

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

RRL

SL

SR

SRSRSL

OUT PUT

2

C

R

SBR

/

P

R

MONI. OUT

SBL

SBR

SW

UNBALANCED

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

2

1

3

)

(

-

3

COLD

3

12312

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

C

7.1CH IN

SW

3123

R

SBL

C

3123123123

SBR

SIRIUS

RS-232C

AC IN

12

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

3

12

MODEL NO. AV8003

!3 i!6@1@2

e Zone Outputs

(Audio output A/B, Video)

These are the audio and video output jacks for the Multi zone. Connect these jacks to optional audio power ampliﬁ ers or video display devices to listen and view the source selected by the zone system in a remote room.

r MONITOR OUT

These are monitor outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. When connecting two video monitors or televisions, be aware that the OSD interface can be used with both MONITOR OUT connections.

t UNBALANCED PREOUT

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals

(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

to the unbalanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

y BALANCED PREOUT

(L, R,SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals to the balanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

!4 CD/CDR Input Selection Switch

Switches between BALANCED and UNBALANCED for the CD/CDR IN terminals.

Notes:

• Always set the input selection before turning on the power. Equipment failure may result If the input selection is switched while the power is on.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

• Audio may not be output from the main unit if the

3

12

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

u NETWORK

Connect to a network device such as a router or

2

1

3

)

(

-

hub. This allows you to play back music, photos, and movie ﬁ les stored on a connected network device.

input to the unit differs from the setting of the Input Selection Switch.

!5 BALANCED CD/CDR IN

Connect to the balanced output terminal of a Super

CONNECTIONS

Audio CD Player or similar player.

i Subwoofer Output

These are subwoofer outputs and each one includes both unbalanced and balanced jack conﬁ gulations. Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered subwoofer .

o SPEAKER C switch

Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this unit or set to

o!0!2!1!5 !4!7!8!9

u

OFF for normal connection (surround back and zone speakers). (See page 19)

!0 SIRIUS terminal

Connect the SiriusConnect Home tuner. See page 17 for connecting information.

!1 XM terminal

Connect the XM Mini Tuner and Home Dock. See page 17 for connecting information.

!2 RS-232C

The RS-232C port is to be used in connection with an external controller to control the operation of the unit by using an external device.

The UNBALANCED CD/CDR input terminals are the CD/CDR IN terminals in @3.

Note:

Do not connect to the BALANCED and UNBALANCED terminals at the same time.

!6 7.1 CHANNEL or AUX INPUT

By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD multichannel player, or other components that has a multichannel port, you can playback the audio with

5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.

!7 EMITTER OUT

The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals are output to this terminal. External devices can be controlled by connecting them to this terminal.

!8 IR RECEIVER IN

Connect to an external IR receiver.

!9

FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)

These terminals are to control the unit from each zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.

BASIC

ADVANCED

REMOTE

SETUP

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to update the operating software of the unit so that it will be able to support new digital audio formats and the like as they are introduced.

@0 DC TRIGGER output terminal

Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…) Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the

!3 AC INLET

Plug the supplied power cable into this AC INLET and then into the power outlet on the wall. This unit can be powered by 120V AC only.

conditions by which these jack will be active. (See page 36)

Note:

• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is

TROUBLESHOOTING

not sufﬁ cient for drive capability.

OTHERS

7

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

@1

ZONE REMOTE IN/OUT terminals

IN: Connect to a zone remote control device,

available from y our Mar antz dealer.

OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped

with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi zone.

CONNECTIONS

@2 REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals

Connect to a Marantz component equipped with remote control (RC-5) terminals.

@3 AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1,

DSS/VCR2, T APE, CD/CDR)

These are the analog audio inputs and outputs.

SETUP

There are 6 audio inputs and 4 audio outputs. The audio jacks are nominally labeled for cassette tape

decks, compact disc play ers, DVD players and etc....

The audio inputs and outputs require RCA-type connectors.

OPERATION

BASIC

@4 DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /

OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)

These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical jacks. The inputs accept digital audio signals from a CD,

OPERATION

ADVANCED

DVD, or other digital source component. For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1 optical output. The digital outputs can be connected to MD recorders, CD recorders, or other similar components.

CONTROLLER

@5

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

VIDEO IN/OUT (TV, DVD, VCR1, DSS/VCR2)

These are the video inputs and outputs. There are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each one includes both composite video and S-video conﬁ gurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and other video components to the video inputs. The 2 video output channels can be used to be connected to video tape recorders for making recordings.

@6 HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT

This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 2 HDMI output. The input function can be selected from the OSD menu system. (See page 24)

OTHERS

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC2001

The provided remote controller is a universal remote controller. The POWER button, numeric buttons and control buttons are used in common across different input source components. You can use the Wizz.it3 editing software to select your fav orite settings for the buttons and pages of the remote controller.

z POWER ON and OFF b uttons

These buttons are used when controlling devices that have been set with separately powered on and off remote commands.

x SOURCE ON/OFF button

This button is used when controlling devices that have been set with a single power on/off remote command.

RC2001 LCD INDICATORS

A

z

v

x c

v

c LCD Display

Remote controller display

v Programmable soft buttons

These buttons are used by the Wizz.it 3 editor software to make LCD display and button operation settings. These buttons are also used to adjust the number of pages for each device.

B

C

b n

.

m ,

.

⁄0

b Page Scroll buttons

These buttons are used when scrolling pages in Home mode and the device modes.

n Home button

This button is used to select Home mode. To select a device that will be controlled, ﬁ rst select Home mode, then select the device.

m Light button

This button is used to turn on the backlight for the buttons and LCD .

, Cursor , ENTER buttons

. Programmable Hard b uttons

These buttons are used by the Wizz.it 3 editor software to make the remote controller command settings for learning and macro operations.

⁄0 USB port

This port is used to connect the remote controller and a PC with the supplied USB cable to enable editing with the Wizz.it 3 editor software.

A Mode display area

Home:

This is displayed during Home mode.

Device Name:

This displays the device mode name that is currently active. This area is always highlighted.

B Command display area

This displays the information that has been set for the display items in the device modes.

C Battery indicator

This displays the remaining battery power.

D Sub info. Area

Normal operation:

The page number that has been set for the respective mode is displayed.

When sending IR command:

The command name that has been set for the respective button is highlighted.

Operation when not sending an IR command (such as jump operation):

The operation name that has been set for the button is displayed normally (not highlighted).

D

8

ENGLISH

REMOTE CONTROLLER RC101

The included remote controller can be used in zone systems. Using this remote controller, you can operate the unit through infrared receivers or the infrared receptor of Marantz products in multiple ZONEs. The SOURCE ON/OFF button and control buttons are used in common across different input source components. The input source controlled with the remote controller changes when one of the input selector buttons is pressed.

⁄7 ⁄6

z

x

c

⁄5 ⁄4

v b n

⁄3 ⁄2

m

,

.

⁄0 ⁄1

z POWER ON and OFF b uttons

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the ZONE control or zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to turn on or off, for the unit in main zone.

x SOURCE ON and OFF buttons

These buttons are used to turn on or off a speciﬁ c source (such as a DVD player) independently from the rest of the system.

(When NETWORK mode (AUX2) is selected)

SOURCE ON button

This button is used to select the screen resolution.

SOURCE OFF button

This button is used to return to the previous screen.

c AMP - SOURCE /Numeric buttons SOURCE buttons

These buttons are used to switch the source of the unit. Each time a source button is pressed, the remote control changes to the source which was pressed. This remote controller can control 12 types of equipment. To change the unit source, press this button twice within two seconds. The signal is sent when it is pressed the second time.

Notes:

• Press AUX2 to switch to NETWORK function.

• The T2 button is not used for this unit.

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the zone/zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to select the source for the unit in main zone.

Numeric buttons

Use these buttons only for preset setting.

v AMP - VOL +/- buttons

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the zone control or zone speaker.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to adjust the volume for the unit in main zone.

b AMP - MUTE button

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

This button is used to mute the audio for the zone control or zone speaker control of the unit.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

These buttons are used to mute the audio for the unit in main zone.

n 3, 4, 1, 2 (CURSOR) / ENTER

buttons

These buttons are used when operating cursor of a source.

(When Tuner mode (T1) is selected)

PRESET +/ PRESET - buttons

Used to select a preset station up and down.

TUNE 3 /TUNE 4 buttons

Used to tune a frequency station up and down.

m SLEEP button

(When Zone A/B mode is selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of zone control mode.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

This button is used for setting the sleep timer of the unit receiver in main zone.

, CONTROL buttons

These buttons are used when operating PLA Y, ST OP, PAUSE and other commands of a source.

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

P.SCAN button

Used to start preset scan.

CLEAR button

Used to stop preset scan.

. A/B/C/D buttons

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select the band of tuner (AM/FM).

Note:

The C (XM) and D (DAB) button are not used for this unit.

(When the other source is selected)

Reserve key for the learning commands.

⁄0 SET button

This button is used to enter learn mode, preset mode and clone mode.

⁄1 ZONE button

This button is used to set the zone area.

• Zone A

• Zone B

• Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

• Zone D (MAIN ZONE)

⁄2 DISC+/T.MODE

(When TUNER mode (T1) is selected)

Used to select auto stereo mode or mono mode when the FM band is selected. The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.

(When CD/DVD/CDR mode is selected)

Used to change the disc for the CD/DVD/CDR changer.

⁄3 INFO button

(When Zone A mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for selected zone control of the unit is displayed on the TV monitor.

(When Zone D (MAIN ZONE) mode is selected)

When this button is pressed, the current setting for the unit are displayed on the TV monitor.

⁄4 MENU/INPUT button

(When DVD mode is selected)

Used to menu command.

(When TV mode is selected)

Used to select the TV video input.

⁄5 CH 3/4 buttons

These buttons are used to change channels in TV mode and DSS mode.

⁄6 SEND indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is transmitting a signal.

⁄7 LEARN indicator

Indicates when the remote controller is in the LEARN mode.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

9

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS

SPEAKER PLACEMENT

The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,

CONNECTIONS

a center speaker, surround left and right speakers, a surround back left and right speakers, and a subwoofer . For best results we recommend that all front speakers be of the same type, with identical or similar driver units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front sound stage as the action moves from side to side. Your center channel speaker is very important as over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture

SETUP

emanates from the center channel. It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not be identical to the front channel speakers, but they should be of high quality. The surround center speaker is useful for playback

OPERATION

of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of

BASIC

the beneﬁ ts of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that surround channels are discrete full range, while they were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type systems. Bass effects are an important part of home theater. For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used

OPERATION

ADVANCED

as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If you have full range front speakers, however, they may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper setting of the switches in the menu system.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

Subwoofer

Front Right

Front Center

Front Left

Front left and right speakers

We recommend to set the front L and R speakers with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.

Center speaker

Align the front line of the center speaker with the front L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little backward from the line.

Surround left and right speakers

When this unit is used in surround operation, the preferred location for surround speakers is on the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Surround back left and right speakers

Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1channel system is installed. Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the listening position. The center of the speaker should face into the room.

Subwoofer

We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum bass effect. As the subwoofer only handle lo w frequency . You can place it any where in the room.

Surround Right

Surround Left

Surround Back Right

Surround Back Left

HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS

Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker

Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the three front speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

Surround left and right speakers, and surround back speaker

Place the surround left, right and surround back speakers higher than your ears by about 27-9/16 – 39-3/8 inchs (70cm–1m). Also place the speakers at the same height, as best as possible.

27-9/16 39-3/8 inchs (70cm 1m)

Note:

• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left, right and the center speakers when the speakers are installed near the TV.

10

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

( 2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

( 3

)

DVD

( 2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

DC CONTROL

IN

FLASHER

OUT

OUTININ

REMOTE CONTROL

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

AC OUTLET

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

IN

SL

R

SBL

SBR

C

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCEDBALANCED

UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED

SL

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

( 2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

( 3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

( 1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

DC CONTROL

IN

FLASHER

OUT

OUTININ

REMOTE CONTROL

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

AC OUTLET

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

IN

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

UNBALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCEDBALANCED

UNBALANCEDUNBALANCED

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (BALANCED)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals to the balanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the SW jack to connect a powered subwoof er (po w er ampliﬁ er built in ).

3

12

AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

2

1

3

)

(

-

3

COLD

NETWORK

MM8003

AC OUTLET

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

Powered

Subwoofer

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VCR1

3

VIDEO

ININININOUT

6

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

TV

L

R

CHANNEL 8

(

OPTION

UNBALANCED

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

IN

)

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CHANNEL 7

(

)

C

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

COMPONENT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

IN

CHANNEL 6

(

SBR

UNBALANCED

VIDEO

INPUT 3

BALANCED

PUSH

3

C

Y

INPUT 3

(

)

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CHANNEL 5 (

)

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

B

C

R

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

B

P

R

P

R

P

B

(

OUTPUT 1

)

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

CHANNEL 4

(

SR

BALANCED

PUSH

3

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

CHANNEL 3

(

)

SL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

TV

1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

CD/CDR

IN

UNBALANCED

Y

DSS/VCR2 ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

R

)

AUX

CHANNEL 2

UNBALANCED

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

C

B

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

4

MONI. OUT

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SL

SBL

C

7.1CH

SR

SBR

SW

CHANNEL 1

(

)

(

)

L

R

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

)

(

-

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

IN

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

2

1

3

2

1

HOT

GND

)

(

-

3

COLD

CONNECTION

RS-232C

(+)

L

SBL

SBR

AC IN

OUT

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

IN

12

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

3

12

SWSWC

3123

R

3123123123

MODEL NO. AV8003

OUT

IN

REMOTE CONTROL

AC IN

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

OPTION

)

SBR

C

SR

SBL

R

SL

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

(

)

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

(

)

L

CONNECTION TO AN MM8003 (UNBALANCED)

Connect the L (front left), R (front right), C (center), SL (Surround left), SR (Surround right), SBL (Surround back left), and SBR (Surround back right) terminals to the unbalanced input terminals of a power amp such as the MM8003.

CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER

Use the SW jack to connect a powered subwoof er (po w er ampliﬁ er built in ).

AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

2

1

3

)

(

-

3

COLD

NETWORK

MM8003

AC OUTLET

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

Powered

Subwoofer

VIDEO

L

R

(

CHANNEL 8

(

TV

1

TV

CHANNEL 8

OPTION

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

(

OPTION

)

INPUT 1

3

DVD

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

)

12

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

2

VCR1

3

ININININOUT

6

33221

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

OUT

IN

CHANNEL 7

(

)

C

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

COMPONENT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

IN

CHANNEL 6

(

SBR

UNBALANCED

C

B

Y

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CHANNEL 5 (

)

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

B

(

)

VCR1

DSS/VCR2

(

TV

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

IN

P

R

)

1

CD/CDR

CHANNEL 4

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

SR

3

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

OUT

AAB

CHANNEL 3

(

)

SL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

DSS/VCR2

(

AUX

Y

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

L

R

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

PUSH PUSH

RRL

SL

SR

)

CHANNEL 2

(

)

R

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

MONI. OUT

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH

SBR

SW

CHANNEL 1

(

)

L

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

IN

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

(+)

)

(

-

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

2

1

3

(+)

2

1

HOT

GND

(

)

-

3

COLD

CONNECTION

L

LLSRSRSL

R

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

RS-232C

ONONOFF

AC IN

MODEL NO. AV8003

OUT

IN

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL

IN

AC IN

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

(

)

(

)

SBR

C

(

)

(

)

SR

SBL

(

)

R

SL

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

(

)

L

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

MODEL NO. MM8003

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

11

ENGLISH

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT

PUT

1

OUT

PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

B

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

OMONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

5

AUDIO

OPT.

R

L

OUT

CD/CDR

IN

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

RR

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

BSBR

GNDAMAM

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

AC IN

OUTININ

OUT

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

ZONE

OUT

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

COAX.

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

UNBALANCED

SR

IN

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

VCR1

( 3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

L

CD/CDR IN

AUDIO

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

IN

CD/CDR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SELECTOR

NAMES AND

ABOUT BALANCED JACKS

FUNCTION

• The balanced output connector uses a XLR connector.

• The XLR connector for professional use is internally wired in either of the following two systems.

1. European system

CONNECTIONS

(Pin w = HOT, Pin e = COLD)

CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS

CD recorder

ANALOG

INPUT

OUTPUT

L R

DIGITAL

INPUT

L

OUTPUT

R

Analog Audio

L R

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

Super Audio CD

BALANCED UNBALANCED

LR

L

R

Analog Audio (balanced)

Analog Audio (unbalanced)

L R

HOT

2. USA system (Pin w = COLD, Pin e = HOT)

SETUP

COLD

OPERATION

BASIC

• This unit uses the 1. European system.

When a preamp or main ampliﬁ er adopting the

European system is connected using a cable with XLR balanced connectors, the reproduced signal may be inverted of phase.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

12

w q

e

COLD

w q

e

HOT

GND

R LR L

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VCR1

3

VIDEO

ININININOUT

6

554

5

33221

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

DIGITAL IN

TV

L

R

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

IN

COMPONENT

)

DSS/VCR2

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

IN

C

B

Y

/

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

C

R

C

R

C

/

P

B

DSS

VCR1

ININOUT

IR

IN

AAB

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

3

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

/

P

R

)

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED I

PUSH PUSH

L

R

(

)

AUX

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

RRL

SL

SR

/

P

R

MONI.

SBL

SBR

C

B

Y

/

P

B

P

R

(

)

INPUT 4

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

RECEIVER

FLASHER

IN

2

CD/CDR

ZONE OUT

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

R LR L

Or

R L

SELECTOR

GND

ENNA

COMPONENT

(

)

NPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

R1

3

OUT

COAX.

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

R1

OUT

IN

UNBALANCED BALANCED

(

)

(

INPUT 1

C

Y

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

B

C

R

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

B

P

R

P

R

P

B

(

)

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

IN

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

) 2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

TV

1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

CD/CDR

IN

DSS/VCR2

(

AUX

Y

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

L

R

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

CD/CDR IN

PUSH PUSH

12

RRL

SL

SR

)

OUT

PUT

1

OUT

PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

MONI. OUT

2

1

3

3123

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH

SBR

SW

R L

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

IN

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

(+)

)

(

-

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

SBL

S

AC IN

SELECTOR

The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal which is currently selected.

Caution:

• Do not connect this unit and other components to mains power until all connections between components have been completed.

Notes:

• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete connections may make noise.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are for the L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect input and output properly.

• Refer to the instructions for each component that is connected to this unit.

• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with power cords and speaker cables this will result in generating a hum or other noise.

CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS

• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and 3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital source components.

• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks can be connected to a CD recorder, or a MD deck inputs, respectively.

• Refer to the instructions for each component. To setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or other digital source’s connected to digital input jacks.

• Use ﬁ ber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3 input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.

• You can designate the input for each digital input/ output jacks according to your component. See page 24.

Notes:

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.

• The digital signal jacks on this unit conform to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does not conform to this standard, this unit may not function properly.

• Each type of audio jack works independently. Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are output through the corresponding digital and analog jacks, respectively.

ENGLISH

RSR

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSW

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

OFF

AC IN

OUT

IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

OUT

R

L

AUDIO

TV

IN

VCR1

DVD

2

DVD

(

2

)

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT PUT

1

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

Y

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

Y

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

VIDEO

R

SR

SW

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

INININ

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

AUNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

TV

(

1

)

4

R

L

TV

AUDIO

DSS/VCR2

IN

MONITOR

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VIDEO

DIGITAL IN

IN

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

MONI. OUT

S-VIDEO

CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS

DVD player

VIDEO

AUDIO

DIGITAL

OUT

L R

TV

VIDEO

L

R

L R L R L R

OUT

FM

INPUT 1

(

)

(

DVD

2

1

DVD

2

554

2

DIGITAL IN

TV

DVD

TV

DVD

L L R R

AUDIO

OUT

L R

(

TV

)

7575Ω

ANTENNA

)

IN

ININOUT

6

33221

IN

)

INPUT 2

VCR1

GND

(

3

OUT

)

DIGITAL OUT

AUDIO

COMPONENT

VIDEO OUT

Y C

COMPONENT

VIDEO

(

)

INPUT 3

DVD

(

DSS/VCR2

4

OUT

ININOUT

REMOTE

COAX.

OPT.

MAIN

DSS/VCR2

OUT

IN

L R

VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS

VIDEO

B

/ PB CR

/ PR

S-VIDEO

OUT

PROJECTOR

COMPONENT

VIDEO IN

Y C

B

/ PB CR

/ PR

S-VIDEO

IN

DIGITAL

OUT

Satellite Tuner

AUDIO

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

L R

(

)

(

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

/

)

VCR1

TV

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

IN

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

)

(

)

1

CD/CDR

INPUT 4

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

IN

OUT

P

B

(

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

R

)

Y

DSS/VCR2

IN

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

L

R

(

)

AUX

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

(

)

4

RRL

SL

SR

C

MONI. OUT

SBL

SBR

R

OUT PUT

1

SR

OUT PUT

2

R

SBR

/

P

R

SW

UNB

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

2

1

3

)

(

-

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

C

7.1CH IN

SW

Video

)

DSS/VCR2

IN

COAX.

OPT.

DSS/VCR2

IN

COMPONENT

INPUT 3

INPUT 1

C

B

Y

/

P

VIDEO

B

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

MONITOR

4

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

(

)

(

)

(

INPUT 1

C

B

Y

/

P

B

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

)

MONITOR

ZONE

OUT

IN

OUT

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

)

VCR1

TV

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

IN

C

R

C

B

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

)

(

)

1

CD/CDR

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

(

IN

/

P

R

P

B

P

R

P

B

(

)

(

)

DSS

VCR2

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

(

)

VCR1

3

VCR1

3

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

C

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

R

SR

)

OUT

PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

B

C

R

B

/

P

R

P

B

P

R

P

B

(

)

(

)

4

MONI. OUT

4

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1 2

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SL

SBL

C

7.1CH IN

SBR

SW

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

-

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

LLS

R

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

RS-232C

AC IN

ONONOFF

MOD

ANTENNA

(

)

DVD

554

DIGITAL IN

DVD

(

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

2

VCR1

3

IN

OUT

6

33221

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

OUT

IN

INPUT 1

(

)

(

)

TV

1

TV

1

VIDEO

4

TV

L

R

L R

S-Video

L R

AUDIO

VIDEO

OUT IN

VCR

S-VIDEO

OUT IN

OUT

L R

VIDEO

OUT

VIDEO

TV

S-VIDEO

IN

Analog Audio

Digital Audio (coaxial)

Digital Audio (optical)

L R

There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.

VIDEO jack

The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the conventional composite video signal.

S-VIDEO jack

The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO signals enables high-quality color reproduction. Connect the S-VIDEO output jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input jack on this unit.

Component jack

Make component video connections to a TV or monitor with component inputs to produce higher quality video images. Use a component video cable or 3 video cords to connect the component video out jacks on the unit to the monitor.

Notes:

Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels

• properly.

Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and

white connectors are the for L (left) channel.

• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the video signals properly.

•

If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to the S-VIDEO or component jack on this unit, it is not necessary to connect the conventional video signal to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video inputs, this unit gives priority to the S-VIDEO signal.

• Each type of video jack works independently. Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and SVIDEO jacks or component are output to the corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO or component jacks, respectively.

•

T

his unit

has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically , by sensing the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.

• You may need to setup the digital audio output format of your DVD player, or other digital source components. Refer to the instructions of the each component connected to the digital input jacks.

• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an external RF demodulator with a Dolby Digital decoder to connect the Dolby Digital RF output jack of the DVD player to the digital input jack on this unit.

• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals of this unit can output the same video signal. Moreover, the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the unit can output video signals for zone playback. (See page 34)

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

13

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

SWCC

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

OUTPUT 1

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

HDMI JACK

This unit has four HDMI inputs and two HDMI output. It can send digital video and audio signals from DVDs and other sources directly to a display. It minimizes

CONNECTIONS

signal degradation caused by analog conversion so that high quality images can be enjoyed. This unit is also capable of converting analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video) for HDMI output. Select an input source from the OSD menu system. (See page 24)

SETUP

Notes:

• When the HDMI output is connected to a display monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to connect to a display that supports HDCP.

OPERATION

• There may be no image output if connected to a TV or display that is not compatible with the above

BASIC

format.

• Refer to the instruction manual of the TV or display to be connected to the unit for detailed information regarding the HDMI terminal.

* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONNECTING HDMI COMPONENTS

An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the HDMI jack on the unit with the HDMI jack on a DVD player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player must support multichannel audio transmission through

CONTROLLER

its HDMI jack.

REMOTE

HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI terminal, connect the audio signal separately .

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:

• Some HDMI components can be controlled over

• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,

the HDMI cable, but this unit cannot control other components this way.

etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio are not output.

OTHERS

DVD player VIDEO PROJECTOR

• Some source devices such as DVD players or set top box do not support HDMI repeater operations like those of the unit. In such case, pictures are not

HDMI OUTPUT HDMI INPUT

properly projected on monitors such as TVs and projectors.

• When multiple components are connected to this unit, turn power to unused components off to prevent interference between them.

• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off before disconnecting or connecting cables.

• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing. These types of disks are not played back correctly unless the left, center, right and surround left and right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.

• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1 or later is connected to the unit, multi channel PCM playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio disks.

• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support HDMI 1.2 or later is connected to the unit, DSD playback is not possible even with Super Audio CD.

(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

COMPONENT

(

INPUT 1

TV

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VIDEO

6

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

TV

DVD

L

R

VIDEO

)

(

)

(

)

INPUT 3

INPUT 2

DVD

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

IN

ININOUT

COAX.

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

IN

(

)

(

INPUT 1

C

B

Y

/

P

B

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

)

VCR1

TV

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

IN

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

)

(

)

1

CD/CDR

INPUT 4

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

IN

OUT

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

(

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

C

B

Y

/

P

(

4

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

SL

R

SR

)

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

B

)

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1 2

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH IN

SBR

SW

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SW

UNBALANCED

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

-

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

LLSRSRSL

R

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

RS-232C

AC IN

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

(+)

2

1

3

)

(

-

• The following functions are not available when the unit is connected to equipment that does not support HDMI 1.3a.

SATELLITE TUNER

• Deep Color

• x.v.Color

• Auto Lipsync

HDMI OUTPUT

• Bitstream audio signal decoding, as for Dolby

Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS-HD, and so on

For details, refer to the user’s manuals of connected

equipment.

• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output is connected to the unit, a separate audio cable (opticaldigital, coaxial digital or analog) is needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP”. (See page 24)

• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 64 kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.

• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the HDMI signal may be affected by noise.

14

ENGLISH

R

SR

SL

SW

C

SBR

SBL

L

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

(

DSS/VCR2

)

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

CRS-232C

AAC IN

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

R

L

OUT

LETAPE

OUT

R

UNBALANCED

SR

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

CD/CDR

IN

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

L

SR

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

UOUT UPUT

1

UOUT UPUT 22

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SSW

C

B

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

TMONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

MAIN

REMOTE

OUT

IN

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

REMOTE CONTROL

OUTININ

CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO COMPONENTS

(

)

T 1

TV

INPUT 2

DVD Audio play er

Super Audio CD

Multi channel player

L

R

FRONT SURR.

R L R L R L

or

CENTER

SURR.

SUB

BACK

WOOFER

C

B

C

R

Y

/

P

B

P

R

(

)

INPUT 4

T 3

VCR1

(

)

OUTPUT 1

4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

ONE

DVD

TV

1

OUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

FLASHER

IN

2

T

CD/CDR

OUT

IN

O

CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS

(

)

(

TV

C

R

VCR1

TV

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

IN

INPUT 2

Y

/

P

R

)

INPUT 4

)

OUTPUT 1

(

)

DVD

2

1

FLASHER

IN

CD/CDR

OUT

REMOTE

CONTROL

IN

OUT

)

DVD

C

R

C

B

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

)

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

C

B

Y

/

P

(

4

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

SL

R

SR

)

O P

1

O P

C

R

/

P

R

B

)

MONI. OU

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

2

RC OUT

SBL

SBR

OPTION

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

DVD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

REMOTE CONTROL

IN

OUT

CD player

EXTERNAL INTERNAL

BASIC

OPERATION

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

(

)

DVD

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

(

)

2

RECEIVER

ININOUT

IR

IN

ZONE OUT

AAB

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

L

R

RRSR

(

AUX

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

MONI. OUT

PUSH PUSH

R

SL

SBL

SL

SBL

SR

SBR

)

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

R

/

P

R

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

2

1

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

SELECTOR

C

7.1CH

IN

SW

SR

SBR

SW

(+)

(

R

UNBALANCED

)

-

L

SL

SBL

C

RS-232

TV

VIDEO

L

R

R L R L R L

OUT

REMOTE CONTROL

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

DVD

1

554

DIGITAL IN

TV

DVD

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

2

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

ININININOUT

6

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

IN

COMPONENT

VIDEO

INPUT 3

C

B

Y

/

P

B

(

INPUT 3

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

1

MM8003

8CH POWER AMPLIFIER MM8003

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel player, DVD audio player or external decoder. If you use these jacks, s witch on the 7.1CH INPUT and set the 7.1CH INPUT le v el b y using the SETUP MAIN MENU. See page 24.

q

You can control other Marantz products through this unit with the remote controller by connecting the REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit. The signal transmitted from the remote controller

w

Whenever e xternal infrared sensors or similar devices are connected to RC-5 IN of the unit, be sure to always disable operation of the infr ared sensor on the unit by using the following procedure.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

is received by the remote sensor on this unit. Then the signal is sent to the connected device through this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote control only at the unit. Also, if a Marantz power ampliﬁ er (some models excluded) is connected to one of these terminals, the power ampliﬁ er’s, power switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch. To make REMOTE CONTROL connections with an MM8003, set P.AMPLINK to ENABLE. To make REMOTE CONTROL connections with another power amp, set P.AMPLINK to DISABLE. (See page

35) Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the back of

other units (not the AV8003) to “EXT. ” (EXTERNAL) to use this feature.

1. Hold down the ZONE button and the MENU button on the front panel at the same time for ﬁ ve seconds.

The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL

2.

DISPLAY.

Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change

3.

this to “IR=DISABLE”.

Press the ENTER button. Once this setting

4.

is made, the infrared sensor on the unit is disabled.

Note:

• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected. Otherwise, the unit will be unable to receive remote control commands.

To restore the original setting, perform steps 1

5.

to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

15

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

SWCC

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

INININ

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

))

GNDGND AMAM

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS

FM Feeder Antenna

FM External

CONNECTIONS

Antenna Converter

(

)

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA

INPUT 1

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VIDEO

554

DIGITAL IN

TV

DVD

L

R

COMPONENT

(

)

(

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

)

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

IN

OUT

6

COAX.

33221

OPT.

DIGITAL OUT

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

OUT

IN

Antenna

Y

VIDEO

(

)

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

OUT

REMOTE

MAIN

ZONE

OUT

AUDIO

TAPE

INPUT 1

INPUT 3

CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS

AM Loop

Antenna

(

)

(

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

B

C

R

/

P

B

(

)

VCR1

(

DSS/VCR2

ZONE

TV

OUT

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

IN

2

OUT

IN

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

)

(

)

1

CD/CDR

OUTPUT 1

DVD

FLASHER

OUT

INPUT 4

IN

P

R

P

B

(

)

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

DSS/VCR2

VCR1

3

(

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

AAB

(

AUX

C

B

Y

(

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

SL

R

SR

)

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

P

B

)

4

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1 2

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH IN

SBR

SW

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SW

UNBALANCED

GND

(+)

HOT

)

(

-

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

SBL

RS-232C

AC IN

R

SBR

SIRIUS

AM External

Antenna

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

(

-

Connecting the supplied FM antenna

The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only. During use, extend the antenna and move it in v arious directions until the clearest signal is received. Fix it with push pins or similar implements in the position that will cause the least amount of distortion. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna

The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use only. Set it in the direction and position it to where you

2

1

3

)

receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables, and power cords. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality.

Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna

1.

terminal.

2. Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal. Release the lever.

3.

Note:

• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the AM antenna GND terminal.

1.

Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

2. Bend the base part in the reverse direction.

TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Inser t the hook at the bottom of the loop part into the slot at the base part.

OTHERS

16

4. Place the antenna on stable surface.

CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

Notes:

• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon signs, busy roads, etc.).

• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it well away from power lines, transformers, etc.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

CONNECTING THE ANTENNA WIRE TO THE ANTENNA CONVERTER

Loosen the screws and attach the wire terminals, then tighten the screws with a screwdriver.

CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA

An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is stretched horizontally above a window or outside.

Notes:

• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.

• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock, grounding is necessary.

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

Y

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

SELECTOR

L

R

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

SR

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

MODEL NO. AV8003

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

SIRIUS

XM

CONNECTING THE SATELLITE RADIO

Contracts are required in order to listen to both XM Satellite Radio and SIRIUS Satellite Radio. For details on XM Satellite Radio, see page 55. For details on SIRIUS Satellite Radio, see page 60.

XMXMXM

L

R

OUT PUT

1

SRSRSL

OUT PUT

OUT

C

CR2

UTPUT 2

( 3

OUT

MITTER OUT

R

)

B

/

P

R

)

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

L

R

(

)

AUX

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

RRL

SL

SR

2

C

R

SBR

1

3

SELECTOR

7.1CH

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

IN

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

(+)

(

)

-

SBL

/

P

R

MONI. OUT

2

SBL

C

SBR

SW

LLSRSRSL

R

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

ONONOFF

AC IN

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

(+)

2

1

3

)

(

-

Antenna

AC

adapter

Sirius Connect

HOME tuner

XM SATELLITE RADIO

• Plug the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock into XM terminal on the rear panel.

• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal. When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock.

SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

• Plug the Sirius Connect Home Tuner , Antenna and AC adapter into SIRIUS terminal on the rear panel.

• Position the SIRIUS antenna f or a consistent satellite signal, the antenna m ust be positioned correctly. Use the following map to determine which area you are in and position the antenna accordingly.

(US) (Canada)

SKY

EAST

HORIZON

NORTH

1

WEST

5

2

4

3

SOUTH

AREA ANTENNA AIMING DIRECTION

AREA 1 Aim the antenna EAST or NORTHEAST

AREA 2 Aim the antenna NORTH or NORTHEAST

AREA 3 Aim the antenna NORTH or NORTHWEST

AREA 4 Aim the antenna WEST or NORTHWEST

AREA 5

Aim the antenna STRAIGHT UP at the sky (may require outdoor placement)

SKY

EAST

HORIZON

NORTH

WEST

1

2

3

SOUTH

AREA ANTENNA AIMING DIRECTION

AREA 1 Aim the antenna EAST or SOUTHEAST

AREA 2 Aim the antenna SOUTH or STRAIGHT UP at

the sky (may require outdoor placement)

AREA 3 Aim the antenna WEST or SOUTHWEST

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

17

ENGLISH

SL

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE

OUT

VCR1

( 3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

( 4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

DC CONTROL

IN

FLASHER

OUT

OUTININ

REMOTE CONTROL

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

AC OUTLET

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

B

R

SBR

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SBL

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

OFF

R

L

ZONE OUT

ZONE

REMOTE

ZONE

OUT

IN

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTING FOR THE ZONE

As shown in the diagram, a play er connected to this unit in another ZONE can be used to play music and movies when used in combination with an amp from Marantz or other manufacturer.

If Surround back speakers or SPEAKER C are not being used, the Surround Back Preout

CONNECTIONS

terminals can be used for the ZONE SPEAKER terminals.

AV8003 MM8003

(

)

(

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

B

P

R

P

R

P

B

(

VCR1

DSS/VCR2

)

(

)

TV

1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

CD/CDR

IN

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

)

DVD

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

FLASHER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

OUT

AAB

L R LR

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

L

R

(

)

AUX

C

B

/

P

B

(

)

4

RRL

SL

SR

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

/

P

R

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

2

1

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH IN

SBR

SW

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

(+)

)

(

-

SBL

L

AC IN

R

3123

SBR

SIRIUS

LLSRSRSL

LLR

12

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

UNBALANCED

(+)

2

1

3

(

)

-

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

(

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 7

(

)

C

3

12

)

C

CHANNEL 6

(

)

SBR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

(

)

SBR

RIGHT SPEAKER

(

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 5

(

SBL

)

3

12

)

(

SR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 4

(

SR

)

3

12

)

(

SL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 3

(

SL

)

3

12

)

(

)

R

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CHANNEL 2

(

)

R

LEFT SPEAKER

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 1

(

)

L

3

12

(

)

L

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

2

1

GND

3

COLD

CONNECTION

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

OUT

IN

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

IN

1

3

(+)

2

HOT

BALANCED CABLE

)

(

-

UNBALANCED CABLE

OUT

REMOTE CONTROL

AC IN

MODEL NO. MM8003

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VCR1

3

VIDEO

ININININOUT

6

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

DVD

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

OUT

IN

TV

L

R

)

DSS/VCR2

IN

COMPONENT

COAX.

OPT.

C

B

Y

/

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

IR RECEIVER

OTHERS

ZONE B

R L

FRONT

IR RECEIVER

RC OUT

R L

VIDEO

L R

IN

FRONTRC IN

MONITOR

ZONE A

L R

ZONE LEFT

SPEAKER

MAIN AMP

(For zone)

ZONE RIGHT

SPEAKER

AC OUTLET 120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

18

CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE (BI-AMP CONNECTION)

SL

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

FM

(

Ω

)

GNDAMAM

ANTENNA

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

COMPONENT

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

AC IN

OUT

VIDEO

MONITOR

OUT

DVD

( 2

)

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

TV

(

1

)

ZONE OUT

VCR1

(

3

)

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

6

COAX.

4

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

L

OUT

R

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

L

DSS/VCR2

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

TV

IN

SR

VCR1

IN

DVD

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

1

OPT.

MODEL NO. AV8003

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

DC CONTROL

IN

FLASHER

OUT

OUTININ

REMOTE CONTROL

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

(

L

)

CHANNEL 1

(

R

)

CHANNEL 2

(

SL

)

CHANNEL 3

(

SR

)

CHANNEL 4

(

SBL

)

CHANNEL 5

(

SBR

)

CHANNEL 6

(

C

)

(

OPTION

)

CHANNEL 7

CHANNEL 8

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

AC IN

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

AC OUTLET

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

MODEL NO. MM8003

IN

PRE OUT

R

SL

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBL

SBR

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

SPEAKER C

OFF

ONON OFFOFF

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

A bi-amp connection is possible with speakers that hav e tw o sets of inputs (for treble and bass). This allows you to drive the treble and bass units with separate channel amps , which enables better sound quality.

Connect the speakers as shown in the ﬁ gure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to ON.

Notes:

• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the unit will trip and set the unit to standby. (The STANDBY indicator will ﬂ ash.) In such case, recheck the connections between the speakers and the unit.

• Turn power to the unit off before changing the setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

BALANCED CABLE

SETUP

UNBALANCED CABLE

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

AV8003 MM8003

(

)

(

INPUT 1

(

)

FM

7575Ω

GND

ANTENNA

(

)

(

INPUT 1

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

(

)

(

)

(

)

DVD

2

TV

1

VCR1

3

VIDEO

ININININOUT

6

554

33221

DIGITAL IN

DIGITAL OUT

VCR1

DVD

OUT

IN

TV

L

R

)

DSS/VCR2

IN

COMPONENT

COAX.

OPT.

C

B

Y

VIDEO

INPUT 3

(

)

INPUT 3

VCR1

INPUT 4

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

OUT

REMOTE

IN

OUT

MAIN

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

)

TV

INPUT 2

DVD

C

R

C

R

C

B

Y

/

P

B

P

R

P

R

P

B

(

)

OUTPUT 1

)

INPUT 4

DSS

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

)

VCR1

3

(

)

DVD

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

FLASHER

IN

2

EMITTER

OUT

ZONE OUT

OUT

AAB

(

)

VCR1

(

)

DSS/VCR2

(

TV

1

S-VIDEO

DC OUT

1

2

CD/CDR

IN

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

RRL

L

R

)

AUX

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

C

R

C

B

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

4

MONI. OUT

2

1

3

SELECTOR

SL

SBL

C

7.1CH

SR

SBR

SW

R

SRSRSL

SBR

SBL

SBR

SBL

SWSWC

UNBALANCED

RS-232C

CONNECTION

1

GND

(+)

2

HOT

(

)

-

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

IN

L

AC IN

3123

R

3123

SBR

12

LLR

LLSRSRSL

12

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

UNBALANCED

(+)

2

1

3

)

(

-

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CHANNEL 8

(

)

OPTION

CHANNEL 7

UNBALANCED

(

C

BALANCED

PUSH

3

(

C

)

12

)

(

SBR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 6

(

SBR

)

3

12

)

(

SBL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 5

(

SBL

)

3

12

)

(

)

SR

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

CHANNEL 4

(

)

SR

(

SL

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

CHANNEL 3

(

SL

3

)

12

)

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

CHANNEL 2

(

)

R

PUSH

3

12

(

)

R

CHANNEL 1

(

)

L

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

PUSH

3

12

(

)

L

UNBALANCED

BALANCED

1

GND

3

COLD

CONNECTION

SPEAKER SYSTEMS

6-8 OHMS

2

1

3

2

HOT )

(

-

BASIC

OUT

IN

FLASHER

DC CONTROL

REMOTE CONTROL

IN

(+)

AC IN

MODEL NO. MM8003

AC OUTLET

120V 60Hz

UNSWITCHED 1.25A 150W

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

CHANNEL 1

CHANNEL 2

CHANNEL 3

CHANNEL 4

CHANNEL 5

CHANNEL 6

CHANNEL 7

RIGHT

SPEAKER

LEFT SPEAKER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

19

ENGLISH

L

SR

R

SR

SL

SW

C

SBR

SBL

L

SBLSWSW

SBR

OUT PUT

1

OUT PUT

2

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

INPUT 4

(

DSS/VCR2

)

VIDEO

C

B

/

P

B

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

R

/

P

R

C

B

/

P

B

C

B

/

P

B

Y

INPUT 1

(

TV

)

INPUT 4

(

DSS //

VCR2

)

INPUT 3

(

VCR1

)

INPUT 2

(

DVD

)

RS-232C

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

OFF

AC IN

OUTIN

MONITOR

OUT

(

4

)

ZONE

OUT

DVD

(

2

)

TV

(

1

)

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

OUT

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

SELECTOR

DC OUT

R

L

OUT

L

TAPE

OUTININ

R

OUT

AUDIO

BALANCED

PRE OUT

UNBALANCED

SR

SL

SBR

SBL

SW

C

B

7.1CH IN

(

AUX

)

AMODEL NO. AV8003

MAIN

ZONE

CD/CDR

IN

REMOTE

BALANCED

UNBALANCED

OUT

S-VIDEO

OUT

DSS/VCR2

(

4

)

VCR1

(

3

)

MONI. OUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

ZONE OUT

RS-232C

2

1

FLASHER

IN

IR

RECEIVER

IN

1

2

EMITTER

OUT

DC OUT

a

SL

R

SBLSWSWCC

SBR

SPEAKER C

SIRIUS

NETWORK

OFF

BALANCED

PRE OUT

MODEL NO. AV8003

NETWORK

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS WITH NETWORK DEVICES

As shown in the diagram, music, images, and movie ﬁ les stored on a network device can be played by connecting to a network device such as a router or a hub. Use a LAN cable when connecting a network device to the NETWORK terminal of this unit. For settings necessary to use the network and method of operation, see the NETWORK User Guide.

CONNECTIONS

Windows Media Player 11

SETUP

or server software that supports DLNA

OPERATION

BASIC

Computer

Network HDD that supports

DLNA

Router

HDD recorder that supports

DLNA

Straight LAN cable (purchase separately)

To the Internet

Modem

connection

CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT

(

)

(

S-VIDEO

)

INPUT 2

DVD

R

C

B

Y

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

INPUT 4

DSS

OUTPUT 1

(

DVD

FLASHER

IN

OUT

VCR2

OUTPUT 2

(

VCR1

)

2

ININOUT

1

IR

RECEIVER

IN

2

EMITTER

ZONE OUT

AAB

)

(

)

1

CD/CDR

IN

INPUT 3

/VCR2

X.

.

S/VCR2

MPONENT VIDEO

MAIN

INPUT 1

TV

C

B

C

Y

/

P

B

(

INPUT 3

VCR1

(

)

(

VCR1

INPUT 4

DSS/VCR2

(

)

MONITOR

4

ZONE

TV

OUT

REMOTE

OUT

DC OUT

1

IN

2

OUT

ZONE

TAPE

OUT

AUDIO

C

3

OUT

R

/

)

P

R

)

Y

DSS/VCR2

ININOUT

CD/CDR BALANCED IN

PUSH PUSH

R

L

R

(

)

AUX

L

R

OUT PUT

1

SR

SBR

SW

(+)

(

-

UNBALANCED

)

RS-232C

SL

L

SBL

SR

BALANCED

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO.

R

SBL

C

SBR

PRE OUT

SIRIUS

AC IN

OUT PUT

2

C

R

C

B

/

P

R

P

B

(

)

4

MONI. OUT

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

2

1

3

COLD

UNBALANCED BALANCED

L

SL

SR

SELECTOR

SBL

C

7.1CH IN

SBR

SW

R

SBR

ADVANCED

IN

SIRIUS

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Note:

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

• The unit's network connector supports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. Use a 100BASE-TX connection to ensure

• Use a straight LAN cable that is category 5 or higher.

• If there are not enough LAN connectors, add a hub (purchase separately) to the router.

• The term network device refers to the following devices. – Hard disk with a built-in DLNA server function (LAN connection type) – HDD recorder or audio system that supports DLNA – A computer can be used when either of the following server software programs is installed.

• Windows Media Player 11

• Server software that supports DLNA

20

LLSRSRSL

SBL

BALANCED

PRE OUT

SPEAKER C

ONONOFF

MODEL NO. AV8003

smooth playback.

CONNECTION

1

GND

2

HOT

3

COLD

NETWORK

LAN

WAN

g s f d

a RS232C

Connect an external control device or other device f or servicing. (Use a straight cable f or the connection.)

Straight LAN cable (purchase separately)

s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)

External devices can be controlled from the unit by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V 44mA max).

d EMITTER OUT

Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER OUT terminal.

f FLASHER IN

This unit can be controlled by connecting a control box or other control device to this unit.

g IR RECEIVER IN

This unit can be operated by remote controller without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting an external IR receiver.

GND

+12V

Signal

An IR receiver is connected as shown above.

Caution:

• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the unit, therefore do not do this.

• 50 mA of current are supplied to the device connected to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.

• Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA of current to this unit will damage this unit. Before using other devices, carefully check the speciﬁ cations of those devices.

(+)

2

1

3

)

(

-

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAK ER

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

ENTER

SETUP MIC

SETUP

After all components are connected, initial setup must be performed.

ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM

This unit incorporates an onscreen menu system, which makes various operations possible by using the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and ENTER buttons on the remote controller or on the front panel.

Note:

•

To view the onscreen displays, make certain you have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel to the composite, S-Video, component video or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page 13, 14)

1. Press the HOME button on the remote controller. (This step is not needed when operating the setup menus from the unit.)

Press the MENU button on the remote controller

2.

or press the MENU button on the front panel. The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system is displayed.

There are 7 items in the MAIN MENU.

Select the desired sub-menu with the

3.

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. The display will change to the selected submenu.

Notes:

• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set

it to UNLOCKED.

• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-7 on the MAIN

MENU to “LOCKED”.

(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the

MAIN MENU.

(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1

or 2 cursor buttons.

3 or

4

RC2001 BUTTON CONTROL

ENTER button

LEFT button

MENU button

Press this button to display

the OSD menu system.

AV8003 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL

Press this button to display

MENU button

the OSD menu system.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

LEFT button

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

ZONE

HOME button

UP button

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

UP button

RIGHT button

CONNECTIONS

DOWN b utton

EXIT button

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

EXIT button

T-M OD E

BAND

TOP

Press this button to exit the OSD menu system.

M-DAX

TOP button

Pressing this button while making setup settings returns to the top screen of the OSD menu.

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

To exit from OSD menu system, press the

4.

RIGHT button

EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the

unit or the remote controller.

DOWN b utton

ENTER button

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

21

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

Note:

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS

• After you complete this portion of the setup, move

• Press the TOP button on this unit to return to the top

cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

screen of the main menu while setting setup items.

MAIN MENU

1.INPUT SETUP

2.SPKR SETUP

3.SURR SETUP LOCKED

4.VIDEO SETUP

5.PREFERENCE UNLOCK

6.ACOUSTIC EQ

7.NETWORK

SUB MENU

7.NETWORK SETUP

VIDEO :NTSC

RESOLUTION :AUTO

SCREEN SAVER:ON

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 23)

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 26)

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 32)

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV-AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE CONPONENT I/P:DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 HDMI ASPECT :THROUGH HDMI OUT1 RES:AUTO HDMI OUT2 RES:AUTO COMP OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 34)

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“7. NETWORK SETUP” (P. 38)

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 35)

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

“6. A COUSTIC EQ” (P. 37)

22

ENGLISH

1 INPUT SETUP

This menu is for setting the matching the output of connected audio devices and the input jacks of this unit.

•

FUNC INPUT SETUP :

“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 24)

•

7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :

“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 24)

•

FUNC RENAME :

“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 25)

Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN

1.

MENU with 3 ENTER button.

2. Select the desired sub-menu with the cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button.

or

4 cursor button, and press the

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3 or

4

P. 24

☞

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1 DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:AUTO - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX :AUTO - - - 3

SIRIUS :AUTO -

RETURN BACK EXIT

1.INPUT SETUP

FUNC INPUT SETUP

7.1CH INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION RENAME

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 24

☞

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 25

☞

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

__

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

23

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP

FUNCTION

(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)

The 6 digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to the preferred source.

CONNECTIONS

Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are to be assigned to which input source.

Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the

1.

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 1 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S

TV :AUTO 1 1 1 1

SETUP

2. Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor

OPERATION

BASIC

MODE

AUTO:

OPERATION

ADVANCED

HDMI:

DIG:

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

ANA:

TROUBLESHOOTING

DIG

DVD :AUTO 2 2 2 2 VCR1 :AUTO 3 3 3 3 DSS :AUTO 4 4 4 4

RETURN NEXTT EXIT

buttons, and assign a mode and input jack (DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).

Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the digital input signal condition. If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog signal present, the analog signal will be played. "AUT O" is the initial setting of all input sources.

Select “HDMI” used

.

Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be used.

Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital input jacks are used.

The 6 digital inputs can be assigned to a desired source. Assign the number of a digital input jack to the device.

, when only a HDMI signal will be

or

4 cursor

COMP

Assign the number of a component video input jack to the device.

V/S

Assign the number of a composite video and Svideo input jack to the device.

Note:

• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when assigning to input functions.

Press the ENTER button.

3.

Select each mode setting and input terminal

4.

with the 1

Press the ENTER button.

5.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

6.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

7.

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and then press the

ENTER button to go to the next page.

Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.

8.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from

the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4,

1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽ mark.

or

2 cursor buttons.

FUNC INPUT SETUP 2 FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S

TAPE:AUTO - - - 1 CD/R:AUTO 5 - - 2 AUX :AUTO - - - 3

SIRIUS :AUTO -

RETURN BACK EXIT

1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP

This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1channel input sources. Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level.

1. Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the

1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

7.1CH INPUT SETUP VIDEO-IN : LAST FRONT L : 0dB CENTER : 0dB FRONT R : 0dB SURR.R : 0dB SURR.B R : 0dB SURR.B L : 0dB SURR. L : 0dB SUB W : 0dB

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3

2.

buttons.

Using the 1

3.

video input source to be played through the MONITOR OUT jack.

The input source is switched by pressing the

1

or

LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔ NET

↔ T APE ↔ CD/R ↔ AUX ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...

Notes:

•

When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was activated.

• When MONITOR OUT jack.

or

2 cursor buttons, select the

2 cursor buttons as follows;

“

V-OFF

” is selected,

no signal is emitted from

or

4 cursor

Select desired channel with the 3

4.

buttons.

Using the 1

5.

volume level of each channel.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.

Note:

• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and +12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.

or

2 cursor buttons, adjust the

or

4 cursor

HDMI

Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the device.

OTHERS

Note:

• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to THROUGH, audio is not output from the unit. (See page 35)

24

ENGLISH

1-3 FUNCTION RENAME

Input sources can be registered under any name. This menu is for renaming input source. This menu is for renaming function name. Names can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces. (Characters are selected from those appearing on the display.) This name appears on the unit's FL display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the OSD Setup menu.

Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.

1.

INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

FUNCTION RENAME

FUNCTION: TV RENAME : TV________

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$ %&’()*+,../:;<=>? _{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 buttons.

Select an input source with the 1

3.

buttons.

__

or

4 cursor

2 cursor

Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.

9.

BACK:

Deletes the character left of the cursor in the “RENAME” area one character at a time.

DEFAULT:

Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the name in the “FUNCTION” area.

SPACE:

Inserts a space at the cursor point of the “RENAME” area.

Note:

• RENAME cannot be left blank.

Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go

to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

Select “RENAME” with the 3

4.

buttons.

Move the cursor to the char acter (1st to 10th) to

5.

change with the 1

Move the cursor to the character list with the 4

6.

cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A” to begin with.)

Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2

7.

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the selected

8.

letter.

or

2 cursor buttons.

or

4 cursor

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

25

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP

After you have installed the unit connected all the components and determined the speaker layout, it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for your environment and speaker la yout.

CONNECTIONS

Before you perform the following settings, it is important that you first determine the following characteristics:

•

AUT O SETUP:

“2-1 AUT O SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”

(see page 27)

•

MANUAL SETUP:

SETUP

“2-2 MANUAL SETUP”

•

THX AUDIO SETUP:

“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP”

Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU

1.

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

with 3

or

ENTER button.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

4 cursor buttons and press the

(see page 30)

(see page 31)

P. 27

☞

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:- 1st MIC POSITION NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

AUTO SETUP

NOW ANALYZING!!

CANCEL

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

P. 30

☞

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : YES SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : MIX

RETURN NEXT EXIT

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : ft FRONT L : 10.0 ft CENTER : 10.0 ft FRONT R : 10.0 ft SURR.R : 10.0 ft SURR.B R : 10.0 ft SURR.B L : 10.0 ft SURR.L : 10.0 ft SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

P. 31

☞

THX AUDIO SETUP

BOUNDARY GAIN COMP. THX ULTRA2 SUB-W:YES B.G.C. :ON

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

buttons, and press the ENTER button.

After you complete this the portion of the setup,

press the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor button. The cursor will move to “RETURN” and press the ENTER button to go to the Sub-menu.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

26

or

4 cursor

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : MANUAL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)

The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of the unit measures sound characteristics of the speaker system and room where the unit is used and automatically optimizes settings.

The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by this unit provides the best listening environment for multiple listeners. To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6 listening positions, using the supplied microphone. The measurement results are analyzed using an original algorithm and environmental settings are made to improve the sound characteristics of the listening area. To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker distance, etc.) without using the AUT O SETUP feature , see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 30 of the manual.

HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP

During measurement, the OSD menu displays the condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.

Connect the speakers, power amp of a MM8003

1.

or other amp to this unit and place the speakers in suitable locations.

Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC

2.

jack on the unit.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

ZONE SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

Set the microphone in the listening position.

3.

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

Notes:

• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6 listening positions.

For the ﬁ rst measurement, set the microphone in the

main listening position.

• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at ear height in the listening position.

• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and microphone.

• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the volume to the middle point and set the crossover frequency to the highest.

• During measurement, step away from the microphone and operate the unit via the remote controller from a position that is out of the path of the speaker sound.

• The test tone output from the speakers during measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and watch out for small children.

Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN

4.

MENU, select “AUTO SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER button to display the start screen.

Select the number of channels for the surround

5.

back speaker you are using.

For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select

“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use speaker C or zone speaker, select “NON”. See page 19, 36.)

Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons

and press the ENTER button to start measurement.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

RETURN EXIT

1 st Position Check

6.

During the ﬁ rst position check, the following

screen is displayed as the unit checks background noise in the listening room, presence of speakers, and speaker polarity and measures the acoustical characteristics in the ﬁ rst position where the microphone is set up.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:- 1st MIC POSITION NOW ANALYZING !!

CANCEL

EXIT

Note:

• The detection check measures the state of use of all speakers whether actually used or not.

For example, if the center speaker is not used, the

test tone will require time to go from the L-channel to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug the microphone or operate this unit during this time.

When the 1 st Position Check ends, the

7.

following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

Here, to view the results of the detection check,

select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button. The results will be displayed.

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

If the check results indicate an error, take suitable

action with that item and remeasure. (For error messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on page 29.)

After confirming the check results, select

“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the OSD menu.

At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto

Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Note:

• AUTO SETUP is not available in Pure Direct, Source Direct, or 7.1 Channel Input modes.

Move the microphone to the second listening

8.

position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to measure the second point. At this point, you can cancel second point measurement and calculate measurement results by selecting “CALCULATE” and pressing the ENTER button.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

2nd MIC POSITION!! START CHECK CALCULATE

EXIT

Repeat steps 7 until measuring 6 points

9.

between the main listening position and surrounding positions.

When all measurements end, the following

OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:OK

CALCULATE

EXIT

Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button to calculate measurement results. During calculations, the following OSD appears on the display.

AUTO SETUP

______________

NOW CALCULATING!

EXIT

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

27

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

Note:

FUNCTION

• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order to obtain the best results.

• The time needed to complete calculations depends on the number of connected speakers and measured

CONNECTIONS

listening positions. The more speakers and listening positions, the more time is needed.

Chec king Measurement Results

10.

When calculations for the measurement results

end, a screen appears for confirming the calculation results.

CHECK RESULT

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

buttons and press the ENTER button to enter them.

Note:

To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page

ADVANCED

[Example]

REMOTE

38.

Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker detection

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT : YES CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES SURR.R : YES SURR.B R : NON SURR.B L : NON SURR.L : YES SUB W : YES

RETURN NEXT

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for speaker size and

crossover frequency

SPEAKER SIZE

FRONT L : AUTO CENTER : AUTO FRONT R : AUTO SURR.R : AUTO SURR.B R : AUTO SURR.B L : AUTO SURR.L : AUTO

RETURN NEXT

CROSSOVER FREQ

FRONT : AUTO CENTER : AUTO SURR : AUTO SURR.B : AUTO

RETURN

* AUT O is displayed to indicate that the speak er size

and crossover frequency results were automatically measured.

Storing Measurement Results in Memory

11.

Once finished confirming the measurement

results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to display the CHECK RESULT screen.

CHANNEL LEVEL

FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : -6.5dB FRONT R : -1.5dB SURR.R : +1.0dB SURR.B R : +9.5dB SURR.B L : +12.0dB SURR.L : -2.5dB SUB W : -12.5dB

RETURN NEXT

Note:

Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all measurement results and calculation results, therefore operate the remote controller with care.

When storing operations end, the following OSD appears on the display.

2.SPKR SETUP

AUTO SETUP MANUAL SETUP

THX AUDIO SETUP

RETURN EXIT

Notes:

• Do not turn the power to the unit off while storing parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the unit’s memory and may damage the unit.

• Please set any THX Certiﬁ ed speakers manually to “Small” and the crossover “80 Hz” after Auto setup operation.

[Example] Conﬁ rmation screen for the distance from

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

speakers to the listening position

DISTANCE UNIT : ft FRONT L : 30.00ft CENTER : 19.33ft FRONT R : 29.66ft SURR.R : 21.50ft SURR.B R : 12.33ft SURR.B L : 11.66ft SURR.L : 16.33ft SUB W : 12.50ft

RETURN NEXT

* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to

[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1 / 2 the cursor buttons. Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed, the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m] (meters).

28

CHECK RESULT

SPEAKERS CONFIG SPEAKERS SIZE DISTANCE CHANNEL LEVEL CROSSOVER FREQ

STORE

EXIT

Place the cursor on “STORE” and press

the ENTER button to store all parameters including the equalizer parameters in memory. If not wanting to store the calculation results in memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press the ENTER button.

ERROR MESSAGES

MIC SET ERROR!!

Displayed Error Cause How to Remedy

• The microphone is not properly connected. • Connect the included microphone.

AUTO SETUP

AUTO SETUP: START

MAIN ZONE SURR BACK: 2CH

MIC SET ERROR!!

• Check the microphone connection.

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

RETURN EXIT

NOISE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

NOISE ERROR !!

RETURN EXIT

ANALYZE ERROR!!

AUTO SETUP

SPEAKERS CHECK:

ANALYZE ERROR !!

RETURN NEXT EXIT

* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor

buttons and press the ENTER button. A detail screen like the following appears on the display.

SPEAKER CONFIG CHECK !! SPEAKER FRONT L : YES REV CENTER : NON FRONT R : YES REV SURR.R : NON ERR SURR.B R : YES ERR SURR.B L : YES ERR SURR.L : NON ERR SUB W : YES

RETURN EXIT

• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.

• Volume from the speakers is low.

• The speakers required for suitab le playback were not detected.

• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.

In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.

• The polarity of the left and r ight channels of the front speakers is backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)

• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but the surround back speaker is connected

(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and

surround back speakers.)

An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are connected as follows.

• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to the surround back R-channel

(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-

channel.)

• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air conditioners.

• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.

• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity

([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly

connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)

• Check speaker direction and la yout

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

29

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

2-2 MANUAL SETUP

FUNCTION

1. Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU.

Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3

2.

cursor buttons.

CONNECTIONS

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

SPEAKER SIZE THX SPKR : YES SUB W : YES FRONT : SMALL CENTER : SMALL

SETUP

When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER SIZE

OPERATION

menu, use the guidelines below .

BASIC

LARGE:

SMALL:

OPERATION

ADVANCED

4.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

5.

6.

TROUBLESHOOTING

THX SPKR

If you are using a full THX speak er systems which are approved by THX Ltd:

• The front, center and surround speaker size

• The subwoofer should be “YES”.

• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be

OTHERS

You need to set the number of surround back speakers be “SMALL”.

SURR. : SMALL SURR.B : 2CH SURR.B SIZE : SMALL LPF/HPF : 80Hz BASS MIX : MIX

RETURN NEXT EXIT

The complete frequency range for the channel you are setting will be output from the speaker.

Frequencies of the channel you are setting that are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from the subwoofer . If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will be output from both the left and right speakers.

Select each speaker with the 3

buttons.

Set the size of each speaker with the 1

cursor buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the next page.

should be “SMALL”.

“80Hz”.

and the surround back speaker size should

30

or

4

4 cursor

or

2

Note:

• When making settings for all channels manually, set THX SPKR to “NO.”

SUB W

YES:

Select when a subwoofer is connected.

NO:

Select when a subwoofer is not connected.

FRONT

LARGE:

Select if the front speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the front speakers are small.

• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed at “LARGE”.

CENTER

NONE:

Select if no center speaker is connected.

LARGE:

Select if the center speaker is large.

SMALL:

Select if the center speaker is small.

SURR.

NONE:

Select if no surround left and right speakers are connected.

LARGE:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround left and right speakers are small.

SURR. B

NONE:

Select if no surround back left and right speakers are connected.

1CH:

Select if one surround back speaker is connected. In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.

2CH:

Select if the surround back left and right speakers are connected.

ZSP A:

Select if using the SURROUND BACK output terminal as Zone Speaker A.

ZSP B:

Select if using the SURROUND BACK output terminal as Zone Speaker B.

Notes:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then this setting is ﬁ xed to “NONE.”

SURR. BACK SIZE

LARGE:

Select if the surround back speakers are large.

SMALL:

Select if the surround back speakers are small.

Note:

• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then

this setting is not available.

LPF/HPF

When you use a subwoofer , y ou can select the cutoff frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of the crossover frequency levels according to the size of the small speakers connected. 60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz → 160Hz → 180Hz

Note:

• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly lower frequency.

BASS MIX

• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE” is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set f or the subwoofer during stereo playback.

This setting has effect only during playback of

PCM or analog stereo sources.

• When “BOTH” is selected, the lo w frequencies will be played through the main L&R speakers and the subwoofer .

In this playback mode, the low frequency range

expands more uniformly throughout the room, but depending on the size and shape of the room, interference may result in a decrease of the actual volume of the low frequency range.

• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play through the main L&R only. This selection is preferred by THX.

Note:

• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS will be played through the subwoofer.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

7.

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 2

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to

go to the next page.

3, 4, 1 and

SPEAKER DISTANCE UNIT : ft FRONT L : 10.0 ft CENTER : 10.0 ft FRONT R : 10.0 ft SURR.R : 10.0 ft SURR.B R : 10.0 ft SURR.B L : 10.0 ft SURR.L : 10.0 ft SUB W : 10.0 ft

RETURN BACK NEXT EXIT

Use this menu to specify the distance of each speaker’s position from the listening position. The delay time is automatically calculated according to these distances. Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly used seating position in the room. This is important for the timing of the acoustics to create the proper sound space that the unit and today’s sound systems are able to produce.

Note:

• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,

the speaker conﬁ guration sub-menu will not appear here. (There are several useful books and special DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper home theater conﬁ guration. If you are unsure, have your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you. They are trained professionals familiar with even the most sophisticated custom installations. recommends the www.cedia.org website for further information.)

Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT

8.

with the 1

Select each speaker with the 3

9.

buttons.

Set the distance for each speak er , press the 1

10.

or

FRONT L:

Set the distance from the front left speaker to your normal listening position.

CENTER:

Set the distance from the center speaker to your normal listening position.

FRONT R:

Set the distance from the front right speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. L:

Set the distance from the surround left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. R:

Set the distance from the surround right speaker to your normal listening position.

or

2 cursor buttons.

or

Marantz

4 cursor

ENGLISH

SUB W:

Set the distance from the subwoofer to your normal listening position.

SURR. B L:

Set the distance from the surround back left speaker to your normal listening position.

SURR. B R:

Set the distance from the surround back right speaker to your normal listening position.

Notes:

• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet (ft) as follows.

m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps (The values appearing on the FL display are

approximate.)

• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the speaker size menu will not appear.

• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears if it is set, two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

11.

move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button

to go to the next page.

SPEAKER LEVEL TEST MODE : MANUAL FRONT L : 0.0dB CENTER : 0.0dB FRONT R : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN BACK EXIT

Here you can set the volume for each speak er so that they are all heard by the listener at the same level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling, adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads 75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and Slow responce.

Note:

• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1 Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source Direct mode.

TEST MODE:

Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the test tone with the 1

or

2 cursor buttons.

If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →

Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments

for each channel. Using the 1

or

2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the same level f or all the speakers.

If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of each speaker as listed below.

Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the

12.

4 cursor button. This unit will emit a pink noise from the front left speaker.

Remember the level of this noise and then

press the 4 cursor button.

(Note that this can be adjusted to any level

between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)

This unit will now emit the pink noise from the

center speaker.

Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the

13.

volume level of the noise from the center speaker so that it is the same level as the front left speaker.

Press the 4 cursor button again. This unit will

14.

now emit the pink noise from the front right speaker.

Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and

15.

other speakers until all speakers are adjusted to the same volume level.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”. Press the ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR SETUP”.

Notes:

• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the

SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.

• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.

• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub menu. (See page 24)

• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.

2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP

You can set the advanced Speaker Arra y.

Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN

1.

MENU.

Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3

2.

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

THX AUDIO SETUP

BOUNDARY GAIN COMP. THX ULTRA2 SUB-W:YES B.G.C. :ON

ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY SURR.B SPKR :TOGETHER

RETURN EXIT

Boundary Gain Compensation

THX UL TRA2 SUB-W : YES or NO

If you have a THX Ultra2 certiﬁ ed subwoofer (or other subwoofer with ﬂ at anechoic response to 20Hz), select “YES”. If set to “YES”, you can chose to activate B.G.C. (Boundary Gain Compensation). If set to “NO”, Boundary Gain Compensation may not be activated and the feature is locked out.

B.G.C.: ON or OFF

Set to ON when you feel too much bass is being output.

OFF: Boundary Gain Compensation is not applied. ON: Boundary Gain Compensation is applied.

Notes:

• If you set

SUB W = NO

in SPEAKER SIZE menu, Boundary Gain Compensation will not be activated. THX UL TRA2 SUB-W also cannot be set.

• If you set

THX ULTRA2 SUB-W = YES

Peak Level setting is not applied.

Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)

SURR.B SPKR: TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART

The best ASA effect is when the surround back speakers are together and facing forward. If the distance between the surround back speakers is,

• Less than 30 cm (12 in.): TOGETHER

• Greater than 30 cm (12 in.), and less than 48 in. (122 cm): CLOSE

• Greater than 122 cm (48 in.): AP ART

or

4

, the Bass

Speaker type and positioning

This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1 channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During system setup, select the distance between surround back speakers.

FL

Front-L Center Front-R

Surround-L Surround-R

SL

Surround A

Surround Back

C

LR

SBL SBR

Surround B

Surround A

FR

Di-polar Radiating Speaker

Direct Radiating Speaker

SR

Notes:

• The Advanced Speaker Array setting cannot be made when using the Zone Speaker function or when ON is set for SPEAKER C on the rear panel of this unit.

• If you set SURR.B = NONE, 1CH, ZSP A or ZSP B in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array will not be activated.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press ENTER button to go to the 2. SPKR SETUP menu.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

31

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

3 SURROUND SETUP

This menu is for setting surround effect parameters for the various surround input signals so as to bring out the live audio effect of your speaker system.

•

CHANNEL LEVEL:

CONNECTIONS

“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL”

•

II

x MUSIC PARAMETER:

PL

“3-2 PLII x MUSIC PARAMETER”

•

CSII PARAMETER:

“3-3 CSII PARAMETER”

•

NEO:6 PARAMETER:

“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER”

(see page 32)

(see page 33)

SETUP

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU with the 3

or

4 cursor buttons and press

the ENTER button.

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

buttons and press the ENTER button.

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3

2.

RE-EQ:

Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off. Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1 or 2 cursor

CONTROLLER

button to activate it.

REMOTE

LFE LEVEL:

Select the output level of the LFE signal included in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal. Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1 or 2 cursor button.

M-DAX:

TROUBLESHOOTING

Select the desired M-DAX mode. Select “HIGH”, “LOW” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor button. (See page 40)

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Note:

OTHERS

• Some settings cannot be made depending on Pure Direct, Source Direct, and the selected surround mode.

or

4 cursor

3.SURR SETUP

CHANNEL LEVEL PL x MUSIC PARAMETER CS PARAMETER NEO:6 PARAMETER

RE-EQ : OFF LFE LEVEL : 0dB M-DAX : OFF

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 32

☞

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.B R : 0.0dB SURR.B L : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

P. 33

☞

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 33

☞

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

P. 33

☞

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL

1. Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU with 3

or

4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER button.

Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3

2.

cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Set the SURR. MODE with the 1

3.

buttons.

CHANNEL LEVEL SURR.MODE: AUTO

CENTER : 0.0dB SURR.L : 0.0dB SURR.R : 0.0dB SURR.BACK L : 0.0dB SURR.BACK R : 0.0dB SUB W : 0.0dB

RETURN EXIT

4. Select the desired menu item with the 3

cursor buttons, set the desired level with the

1

or

2 cursor buttons, and press the ENTER

button.

SURROUND MODE:

The surround mode can be independently set for 3 modes.

1. Multi Ch STEREO

2. CSII

3. Others

CHANNEL LEVEL

CENTER LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the center speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 le vel interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back

speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

or

2 cursor

or

4

32

ENGLISH

SUB W LEVEL:

Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .

• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker

setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will not appear.

Note:

• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or CSI I will affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2 MANUAL SETUP”.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to go to the 3. SURR SETUP menu.

3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER

Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources such as CDs. In this mode, this unit includes three controls to ﬁ netune the sound ﬁ eld as follows.

Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU with

1.

3

or

4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER

button.

Select “PLIIx MUSIC P ARAMETER” with the 3

2.

or

4 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

PL x MUSIC PARAMETER

PARAMETER :DEFAULT

PANORAMA :OFF DIMENSION : 0 CENTER WIDTH: 3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PARAMETER:

Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three parameters as listed below .

PANORAMA:

Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.

DIMENSION:

Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3 le vel in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor b uttons. Adjust the sound ﬁ eld either towards the front or towards the rear. This can be useful to help achieve a more suitable balance from all the speakers with certain recordings.

CENTER WIDTH:

Set the CENTER WIDTH lev el between 0 and 7 in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor b uttons. Center width allows you to gradually spread the center channel sound into the front left and right speakers. At its widest setting, all the sound from the center is mixed into the left and right speakers. This control may help achieve a more spacious sound or a better blend for the front image. If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

3-3 CSII PARAMETER

1. Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN MENU with the 3 the ENTER button.

Select “CS II PARAMETER” with the 3

2.

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

CS PARAMETER

TRUBASS : 0 SRS DIALOG : 0

RETURN NEXT EXIT

TRUBASS:

Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level increments with the TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers adding exciting, deeper bass effects.

SRS DIALOG:

Set the SRS DIALOG level between increments This can be popped out of the surround audio effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what the actors say. If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting cannot be selected.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• This parameter can only be set in the CSII mode.

with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

or

4 cursor buttons and press

1 or 2

cursor buttons.

0 and 6

or

in 1-

3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER

The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1 channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also supports 5.1 channel input.) This mode expands the sound image from the center channel.

Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN

1.

MENU with the 3

4

the ENTER button.

Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3

2.

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

NEO:6 PARAMETER

CENTER GAIN : 0.3

RETURN NEXT EXIT

4. Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and

1.0 in 0.1 level buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Notes:

• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music mode.

• If “ NONE” was selected for the center speaker setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is disabled.

or

4 cursor buttons and press

increments

with the 1

or

2 cursor

or

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

4

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

33

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

4 VIDEO SETUP

Video settings are made as follows.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

1.

MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

the ENTER button.

4.VIDEO SETUP

VIDEO CONVERT

TV-AUTO :DISABLE OSD INFO :ENABLE CONPONENT I/P:DISABLE HDMI OUT :OUTPUT1 HDMI ASPECT :THROUGH HDMI OUT1 RES:AUTO HDMI OUT2 RES:AUTO COMP OUT2 :MAIN

RETURN NEXT EXIT

Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor

2.

buttons and press the ENTER button.

•

VIDEO CONVERT

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for

OPERATION

monitor output.

BASIC

This section explains how to set up conversion for each type of video input.

Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN

1.

MENU with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press

OPERATION

ADVANCED

the ENTER button.

Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3 / 4 cursor

2.

buttons and press the ENTER button.

VIDEO CONVERT

TV : ANA&HDMI DVD : ANA&HDMI

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

3.

VCR1 : ANA&HDMI DSS : ANA&HDMI TAPE : ANA&HDMI CD/R : ANA&HDMI AUX : ANA&HDMI

RETURN EXIT

Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor

buttons and set the video conversion mode with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons

ANA&HDMI:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). Further more, it up-converts from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-

OTHERS

convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog video signals.)

ANA ONLY:

This mode both up-converts and down-converts analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video, Component Video). It does not up-convert to HDMI.

OFF:

This mode turns off all conversion features.

Note:

• For details on video convert feature, see page 40.

•

TV-AUTO

Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. (refer to page 47)

•

OSD INFO

Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. If you select “ENABLE”, this unit will display the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire this information, select “DISABLE”.

Note:

• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD information is output if the Video Convert function is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.

For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 40.

•

COMPONENT I/P

Set whether or not to convert 480i/576i signals to 480p/576p signals when outputting the analog video input signal input from the COMPOSITE terminals, S-VIDEO terminals, or COMPONENT terminals. Select “ENABLE” or “DISABLE. ”

DISABLE: Do not convert ENABLE: Convert

Note:

This setting is enabled only when VIDEO CONVERT is set to other than OFF.

•

HDMI OUT

This setting is for selecting which output terminal, OUTPUT 1 or OUTPUT 2, to output the signal to. Select the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

To use the remote controller (RC2001) to change the HDMI OUT setting, press the HOME button, then the AMP button, and press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. After HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 is displayed on the remote controller , press the HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 button to switch between them.

=

•

HDMI ASPECT

Set HDMI ASPECT in accordance with the screen size of the television connected to this unit. Select THROUGH or 16:9NORM using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

THROUGH:

Output is in the same screen size as the input.

16:9 NORM:

Output includes black bands on the left and right of the television screen.

Notes:

• This setting is enabled only when a 480i/576i signal is input and HDMI RESOLUTION is set to other than THROUGH, or when a 480p/576p signal is input.

• The aspect ratio cannot be changed when the input video signal is 720p or 1080i.

• This setting depends on network settings when a network is selected.

•

HDMI OUT 1 RES

HDMI OUT 2 RES

Selects the resolution of the video signal output from the HDMI terminal of this unit. Select from the following using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

THROUGH ↔ 480/576p ↔ 720p ↔ 1080i ↔ 1080p ↔ AUTO ↔ THROUGH

AUTO:

Sets an appropriate resolution for a television that is connected using HDMI. (If connected by converting to DVI, the output is 480p/576p)

THROUGH:

The output is same resolution as that input.

480p/576p:

The output is 480p/576p.

720p:

The output is 720p.

1080i:

The output is 1080i.

1080p:

The output is 1080p.

Notes:

• The resolution cannot be changed when the input video signal is 720p or 1080i.

• The resolution depends on the network settings when a network is selected.

• Signals are not output when connected to a monitor that does not support HDCP.

•

COMP OUT 2

This setting is for selecting whether to output the images for the main zone or the images for the zone system to the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output destination between MAIN and ZONE A with the 1 / 2 cursor buttons.

Note:

• When ZONE A is selected, video signals converted from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not output.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button.

34

ENGLISH

5 PREFERENCE

•

ZONE SETUP :

“5-1 ZONE SETUP”

•

DC TRIGGER SETUP :

“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP”

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

1.

with the 3

or

ENTER button.

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the desired menu with the 3 buttons and press the ENTER button.

ST AND BY:

When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce the power consumption when the unit is in the Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected, “TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the unit is in the Standby mode.

AUDIO:

In the Audio mode, Dolby Digital and DTS output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select “AUDIO” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, then select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

HDMI AUDIO:

This setting determines whether to play back audio input to the HDMI jacks through the unit or output it through the unit to a TV or projector. ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks

can be played back b y this unit. In such case, audio signals are not output to the TV or projector.

THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is

not output from the speaker terminals of the unit. Audio data is output directly to the TV or projector. This setting is used to listen to audio on a multi channel TV, etc.

(see page 36)

4 cursor buttons and press the

or

4 cursor

HDMI LIP (Auto Lipsync Correction):

Video signals may take longer to process than audio signals depending on the connected video equipment. When the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI

1.3a, audio and video can be automatically synchronized using this function. Use the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to switch between ENABLE and DISABLE. ENABLE: Auto Lipsync Correction is used to

synchronize audio and video.

DIESABLE: Deactivates this function.

Note:

• This function is not available when the unit is connected to equipment that does not support HDMI

1.3a or Auto Lipsync Correction. For details, check the user’s manual of the connected equipment.

• If this function is unavailable, you can use the regular Lipsync function to synchronize audio and video. (See page 47)

P.AMP LINK:

ENABLE: Set when performing REMOTE

CONTROL connection with MM8003.

DISABLE: Set when performing REMOTE

CONTROL connection with a MARANTZ power amp other than MM8003.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button.

5.PREFERENCE

ZONE SETUP A B

DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2

STANDBY : NORMAL AUDIO : MAIN HDMI AUDIO: ENABLE HDMI LIP : DISABLE P.AMP LINK: ENABLE

RETURN NEXT EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-2:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN BACK EXIT

ZONE SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

ZONE SETUP B

AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO

ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

35

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

5-1 ZONE SETUP

FUNCTION

The AV8003 has source selectors, sleep timers and zonespeaker output remote controller for the two other ZONEs in the zone system. These features can be set from this menu.

CONNECTIONS

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN

1.

MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

Select “ZONE SETUP” with the 3 or 4 cursor

2.

buttons and select either “ZONE A” or “ZONE B” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SETUP

Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

3.

The following explanation shows how to operate ZONE A of the zone system. The ZONE B setting does not have the VIDEO FUNCTION.

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

4.

CONTROLLER

VIDEO:

REMOTE

AUDIO:

TROUBLESHOOTING

SLEEP:

MONO/ST:

OTHERS

ZONE SETUP A

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :DVD SLEEP :OFF MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE:OFF SPKR: VOL :VARI VOL : LEV :-90dB LEV :

RETURN BACK EXIT

Select the desired item with the 3

button.

Select the video source of the zone output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Select the audio source of the zone output with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

The sleep mode is available when the zone is active, set the time with 1 or 2 cursor buttons . The sleep timer can be set to a maximum 120 minutes in 10 minute increments.

This mode switches audio output to the zone system between MONAURAL and STEREO, using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

or

4 cursor

OSD INFO:

With this function, on-screen display information is shown on connected TVs or other devices when you switch input functions. Select “ENABLE” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to enable OSD INFO or “DISABLE” to disable it. Select “DISABLE” if this function is not needed.

ZONE:

Switch the zone output “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

SPKR (ZONE SPEAKER):

Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the

1 or 2 cursor buttons.

VOL (VOLUME SETUP):

Select whether the zone or zone speaker output level is variable or ﬁ xed with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):

Adjust the zone output level with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons. The volume can be set between -90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.

Note:

• SPKR setting can be changed when the SURR B is

set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and “SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear panel. When this setting is unavailable, “***” is displayed.

• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the zone output

level cannot be adjusted from the A or B ZONE.

• SPKR cannot be on for both ZONE A and ZONE B at the same time. After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button.

5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP

This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can be used to link with input functions for the main zone or zone. Each trigger can be setup separately.

Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU

1.

with the 3 ENTER button.

Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the

2.

3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

4. You can select “MAIN ZONE”, “ZONE A”, “ZONE B”, “REMOTE”

1

or

Note:

• REMOTE is available for the external control. The RC2001 cannot operate the function.

5. Select desired input source with the 3 cursor buttons.

Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1

6.

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup,

7.

move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 cursor button and press the ENTER button.

Note:

• When an input source that is on in the set ZONE is selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER output terminal.

or

4 cursor buttons and press the

DC TRIGGER SETUP DC TRIG-1:DISABLE

TV : TAPE : DVD : CD/R : VCR1 : AUX : DSS : TUNER : NET : 7.1CH :

RETURN NEXT EXIT

or

“DISABLE” with the

2 cursor buttons.

or

4

2 cursor

or

4

36

ENGLISH

6 ACOUSTIC EQ

This display is for setting up the equalizer and changing the Equalizer mode.

• PRESET G. EQ ADJ : “6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ”

• CHECK AUT O 1 & 2 : “6-2 CHECK AUT O”

EQ MODE:

There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from: PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature (see page 27).

FRONT:

This mode matches the characteristics of each speaker to those of the front speakers.

FLA T:

This mode ﬂ attens the frequency characteristics of all speakers. It is suited for playback of multichannel music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.

AUDYSSEY:

This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics of all speakers so as to create the best listening environment for the sound characteristics of the listening room.

PRESET:

This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that was set in PRESET G.EQ ADJ to adjust the characteristics of each speaker (see page 38).

OFF:

The graphic equalizer is not used.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

1.

with the 3

or

4 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER button.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ ADJ CHECK AUTO

(see page 38)

Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,

3.

“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1

or

2 cursor

buttons.

After you complete this portion of the setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor buttons and press the

ENTER

button. To use the remote controller (RC2001) to change the EQ MODE, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. When EQ is displayed on the remote controller, press the EQ button.

=

Each time this button is pressed, the EQ MODE changes as follows.

OFF FRONT FLAT PRESETAUDYSSEY

Notes:

• “FRONT”, “FLAT” and “AUDYSSEY” can be selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.

• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto Setup is manually turned on, the “FRONT”, “FLA T” and “AUDYSSEY” modes cannot be selected.

• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode, Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual mode is set.

• ACOUSTIC EQ MODEs are not used during playback of Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD signals.

• Tone Control is disabled when an EQ MODE is in use.

6.ACOUSTIC EQ.

EQ.MODE : OFF

PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ CHECK AUTO

RETURN NEXT EXIT

PRESET ADJUST RESET:ALLCH 63-15.0 CH :SR 125 -2.5 250 -5.0

+9

500 +9.0

0dB

1k +3.5 2k -5.5 4k -7.0 8k-18.5

63

250 1k 4k 16k

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63-15.0 CH:SR 125 -2.0 250 -5.0

+9

500 +9.0

0dB

1k +3.0 2k -5.0 4k -7.0

-20-20

8k-18.0

63

250 1k 4k 16k

16k-20.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONS

SETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3 buttons.

or

4 cursor

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

37

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ

FUNCTION

These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic equalizer for each of the 7 channels.

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

1.

CONNECTIONS

with the 3 ENTER button.

Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3

2.

or

4 cursor buttons and press the

cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

PRESET ADJUST RESET:CH 63 0.0 CH :FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

+9

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0 4k 0.0

-20

8k 0.0

63

250 1k 4k 16k

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

RESET:

Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the channel(s) to be reset to either the currently displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”),

OPERATION

and press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

ADVANCED

“ALL” : Resets all channels. “CH” : R esets only the currently displayed

channel.

CH:

Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”, “SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor

CONTROLLER

buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with

REMOTE

the 4 cursor button.

Frequency:

Select the target frequency on the graph with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to enter the selection. Adjust the le vel with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be adjusted

TROUBLESHOOTING

to any level between –20 and +9 dB in 0.5 dB increments.) Move to the next frequency with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, and adjust the lev el.

After you complete this portion of the setup, press the ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4 cursor b uttons and press the ENTER button.

OTHERS

38

or

6-2 CHECK AUTO

These menus are for confirming the results of AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement (AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).

Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU

1.

with the 3 ENTER button.

4

2. Select “CHECK AUTO” with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.

Press the ENTER button to enter the

3.

selection.

Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT”, “FLAT”).

CH:

Select the channel to check with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.

Notes:

• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the Preset G. EQ modes.

• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO 2 menu.

Once ﬁ nished checking, select “RETURN” with

4.

the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” menu.

or

4 cursor buttons and press the

CHECK AUTO MD:AUDYSSEY 63 0.0 CH:FL 125 0.0 250 0.0

+9

500 0.0

0dB

1k 0.0 2k 0.0

-20

4k 0.0 8k 0.0

63

250 1k 4k 16k

16k 0.0

125 500 2k 8k

RETURN EXIT

7 NETWORK SETUP

These settings relate to playing music, photos, and movie ﬁ les stored on a network device connected to this unit.

Select “7. NETWORK SETUP” on the MAIN

1.

MENU using the cursor buttons 3 or 4.

7.NETWORK SETUP

VIDEO :NTSC RESOLUTION :480//576i

SCREEN SAVER:ON

RETURN NEXT EXIT

2. Select the menu you want to set using the cursor buttons 3 or 4, and press ENTER.

• RESOLUTION:

Use the 1 / 2 cursor buttons to select video signal resolution (pixel count) on the NETWORK PLAYER from the following options. “480/576i” ↔ “480/576p” ↔ “720p” ↔ “1080i” ↔ “AUT O” ↔ “480/576i”

AUTO:

Sets an appropriate resolution for a television that is connected using HDMI. (If the unit is not connected to the television using HDMI, the output is 480i/576i) (If connected by converting to DVI, the output is 480p/576p)

480i/576i:

The output is 480i/576i.

480p/576p:

The output is 480p/576p.

720p:

The output is 720p.

1080i:

The output is 1080i.

Notes:

• If a monitor connected using HDMI is changed during the AUTO setting, the screen returns automatically to the top menu and the resolution is changed to one that is appropriate for the monitor. If a dialog box or the TOOL menu is displayed at this time, the resolution is changed after the dialog box or TOOL menu is closed.

• Set 480i/576i if you are using VIDEO/S-VIDEO output.

• If you are using a monitor connected using HDMI, and the signal is being input from the network, the video signal is output in the resolution that was set in RESOLUTION.

• SCREEN SAVER:

Use the 1 / 2 cursor buttons to select “ON” or “OFF” for the screen saver from the video signal that is output from the unit.

ON:

If no operation is made for 10 minutes on the NETWORK screen or SETTING screen, the screen saver is activated on the monitor. (The screen goes dark)

OFF:

The screen saver is not activated even if no operation is made for 10 minutes.

Notes:

• The screen saver is not activated during photo display or video playback.

• This setting can only be changed when the NETWORK function of this unit is selected.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

UINPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

.

BASIC OPERATION

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to any input media, you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

Example : DVD

(Using the unit)

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

ZONE

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

There are three ways to select DVD.

2.

Press the HOME button

1.

Press the 1 button.

2.

THX

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

• As the input source is changed, the new input name will appear momentarily an OSD information on the video display. The input name will also appear in the display, on the front-panel.

2.

2

• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see page 25) , the renamed name appears on the display.

• As the input is changed, this unit will automatically switch to the digital input, surround mode,

3.

1

≠

3

attenuation, and night mode status which were entered during the conﬁ guration process for that source.

• When a video source is selected, the selected video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT terminal.

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE

DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE

Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of Dolby Digital. When playing back software which has been encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a brief message on the FL display which will read "D-NORM X dB" (X being a numeric value). Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the source material has been recorded at a higher or lower level than usual.

NIGHT MODE

Useful at night or when loud noise is undesirable, this mode compresses the dynamic range, making it easier to hear quieter audio content without

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

increasing the overall volume .

1. Press the HOME button. Press the 1.DVD button.

2.

Press the 1.DVD button.

3.

Example: AUTO SURROUND

Note that the effect of night mode is determined by the Dolby Digital content. Night mode may have no effect with content that does not support this function.

BASIC

OPERATION

2.

2

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

ZONE

AUTO

MODE

7.1C

PURE

THX

INP

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

≠

2.

1.

2

1

ADVANCED

OPERATION

1

4.

≠

4

(Using the unit)

To select the Auto surround mode during playback, press the AUTO button on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

3.

3

1. Press the HOME button. Press the AMP button.

2.

Press the < / > button until 007 is display ed.

3.

Press the DVD button.

4.

To select the Auto surround mode, press the HOME button, press the AMP button and press the < / > button until 005 is displayed. Press the AUTO SURR button.

• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on page 41.

• T o add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode, press either the THX button on the unit or the THX button on the remote controller.

• To select a speciﬁ c surround mode, Press the individual surround mode button on page 005, 006 on the remote controller.

T o select this mode, switch the remote controller

1.

to AMP mode, and then press the < / > button until 003 is displayed.

Each time the NIGHT button is pressed, the

2.

mode changes according to the following options indicated on the front of the unit.

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

39

ENGLISH

H

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BANDTEXITMENUZON E

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

HDMI

NAMES AND

• AUTO Mode

FUNCTION

NIGHT AUTO

AUTO mode is available when decording Dolby

TrueHD signals.

When night mode is activated, “NIGHT” is

CONNECTIONS SETUP

illuminated on the front of the unit. (See page 6)

↓

•

NIGHTModeON

NIGHT ON

Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses the

dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.

↓

• NIGHT Mode OFF

NIGHT OFF

T urn off the Night mode.

OPERATION

BASIC

ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME

UP

HDMI

DOWN

OPERATION

ADVANCED

BAND

Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using the

CONTROLLER

VOLUME control knob on the front panel or VOL + /

REMOTE

– buttons on the remote controller.

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob clockwise or press VOL + button on the remote, to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or press VOL – button on the remote controller.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:

• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞ to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

•

However, when the channel level is set as described on page 32, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.

(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range

is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)

OTHERS

40

• If the Main Volume is set to +9 dB or higher, it will be set to +8 dB the next time power is turned on. It will also be saved at +8 dB during back up.

ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE) CONTROL

During a listening session you may wish to adjust the Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes or room acoustics.

(Using the remote controller)

To adjust the tone, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ or BASS–. To adjust the treble effect, TREBLE+ or TREBLE–.

Notes:

• The tone control function is unavailable for the Source Direct, Pure Direct, Headphone, Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 176.4/192kHz PCM.

• The Tone control function is not available when MDAX is being used.

• The tone control function is not available when ACOUSTIC EQ is being used.

• Additionally, tone control is not available during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTS-HD playback.

TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND

To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE button on the remote controller. This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the head-phone jack, but it will not affect an y recording or dubbing that may be in progress. When the system is muted, the display will show “MUTE” . Press the MUTE button again to return to normal operation.

USING THE SLEEP TIMER

To program this unit for automatic standby, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and press the SLEEP button on the remote controller. Each press of the button will increase the time before shut down in the following sequence.

OFF 10 20 30 50 40

100 90 80 70 60 110 120

The sleep time will be shown for a fe w seconds in the display on the front panel, and it will count down until the time has elapsed. When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the unit will automatically turn off. Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed. To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the SLEEP indicator will disappear.

M-DAX (Marantz Dynamic Audio eXpander)

This function makes up for lost audio content in MP3 or AAC sources (from lossy compression) during playback. Choose one of the following levels for this effect as desired. “HIGH”: Stronger effect “LOW”: Weaker effect “OFF”: Deactivated.

(Using the remote controller)

To switch to M-DAX mode, switch the remote controller to AMP mode, and then press the < / > button until 001 is displayed. When “M-DAX” is displayed on the remote controller, press the M-DAX button.

Each time this button is pressed, M-DAX changes as follows.

OFF LOW HIG

Notes:

• M-DAX is compatible with PCM (48 kHz or lower) and two-channel analog sources.

• The M-DAX is not available when Dolby Virtual Speaker mode is being used.

VIDEO CONVERT

ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION

This unit is equipped to convert video signals for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO) between the playback device and this unit, listening and viewing are possible with a single higher grade cable between the MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit and the monitor.

UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO SIGNALS TO HDMI

The up-conversion feature of this unit can output the input analog video signals (for component video signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i and 720p resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite) of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR terminal.

Notes:

• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit. If connecting a playback device such as a DVD player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit to a TV monitor.

• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.

• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast forward and reverse play on video component.

•

If, while attempting to use the video convert feature, the unit cannot synchronize with the display device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility; there is nothing wrong with the unit.

If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the

“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next, connect the video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and the S-video input signal to the display component via the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.

• The video convert feature constantly monitors input video signals and determines whether to convert the input signals or not. However, some input video signals cannot be detected correctly. If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the “VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.

•

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

For optimal video performance, THX recommends setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.

CONNECTION EXAMPLE

• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

or HDMI

Notes:

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, 480p/576p, 1080i or 720p, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or SVIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• If the resolution of the component video signal input from the playback device is other than 480i/576i, it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the unit.

• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

or component

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

UP

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

UP

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

VIDEO

or S-VIDEO

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

UP

HDMI

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DOWN

VOLUME

ZONE

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

TOP

DISPLAY

THX

M-DAX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

component

Notes:

• The HDMI video signal input from the playback device is not output from the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the unit.

Notes of OSD menu system:

• The setup menu can be displayed through all video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”, “SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).

• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.

OSD information is also output when the video

conversion feature is on and the video signal input to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the unit is converted and output from the COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.

CONPONENT I/P

The video circuit of the unit is equipped with an I/P conversion feature . When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO) input from a playback device can be converted to 480p/576p and progressively output to the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals of the unit. (For setting instructions, see page 34)

HDMI RESOLUTION

This function is used to output the analog video signal to HDMI. 480i/576i signals can be converted to 480p/576p, 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals, while 480p/576p signals can be converted to 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals. The output resolution can be set for HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2.

Notes:

• Do not set to 1080i, 720p, or 1080p when connected to a monitor that does not support 1080i, 720p, or 1080p signals. The SETUP MENU will not be displayed. If the SETUP MENU is not displayed, change settings while viewing the main unit display panel.

• A 720p signal cannot be converted to 1080i or 1080p signal, and a 1080i signal cannot be converted to a 1080p signal.

• The resolution of analog component output cannot be changed.

• HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 cannot be output simultaneously.

ENGLISH

SURROUND MODE

This unit is equipped with many surround modes. These are provided to reproduce a variety of surround sound effects, according to the content of the source to be played. The available surround modes may be restricted depending on the input signal and speaker setup.

The relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal

The surround mode is selected with the surround mode selector on the unit or the remote controller. However, the sound you hear is subject to the relationship between the selected surround mode and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

AUTO Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

SOURCE DIRECT PURE DIRECT

EX/ES Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (5.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1ch) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (6.1ch) Dolby TrueHD (7.1ch) DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Stereo) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Digital 2.0 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx movie Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD (5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD (7.1) DTS-HD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (5.1ch) SA-CD (2ch) SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) PCM (Stereo) PCM 96kHz PCM (Stereo 96kHz) HDCD HDCD Analog Stereo

7.1ch input Multi Ch

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS (5.1ch) DTS-ES

Multi-PCM

SA-CD (5.1ch)

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyTrueHD DolbyTrueHD DolbyTrueHD

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital +

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

DolbyDigital +

Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby Digital EX

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O O O O O O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO

SLSRSBL

SubW

SBR

---

---ODSD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

---

---ODSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, R

O

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, R

O

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL

2

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

Depend on speaker setup

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

41

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

DOLBY (PLIIx movie) (PLIIx music) (PLIIx game)

CONNECTIONS SETUP

DTS (Neo:6 Cinema) (Neo:6 Music)

OPERATION

CSII Cinema

BASIC

CSII Music CSII Mono

STEREO Dolby Surr.EX Stereo

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

Dolby Virtual Speaker

OTHERS

Multi Ch. Movie Music (O): Movie mode only.

Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx Dolby D (2ch) Pro Logic IIx Dolby D (2ch Surr) Pro Logic IIx Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (6.1) DolbyTrueHD Dolby TrueHD (7.1) DolbyTrueHD Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx SA-CD (2ch) Pro Logic IIx PCM (Audio) Pro Logic IIx HDCD Pro Logic IIx Analog Pro Logic IIx DTS-ES DTS 5.1 DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 DTS-HD(5.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD(6.1) DTS-HD DTS-HD(7.1) DTS-HD Dolby D (2ch) Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch Surr) Neo:6 SA-CD (2ch) Neo:6 PCM (Audio) Neo:6 HDCD Neo:6 Analog Neo:6 Dolby D (2ch) CS Dolby D (2ch Surr) CS SA-CD (2ch) CS PCM (Audio) CS HDCD CS Analog CS

Dolby D (5.1ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch) Stereo Dolby D (2ch Surr) Stereo Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo DTS-ES Stereo DTS 96/24 Stereo DTS (5.1ch) Stereo DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Stereo Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Stereo SA-CD (2ch) Stereo PCM (Audio) Stereo PCM 96kHz Stereo HDCD Stereo Analog Stereo Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS-ES Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS 96/24 Dolby Virtual Speaker DTS (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker Multi Ch-PCM Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker SA-CD (2ch) Dolby Virtual Speaker PCM (Audio) Dolby Virtual Speaker HDCD Dolby Virtual Speaker Analog Dolby Virtual Speaker Dolby Surr.EX Dolby Digital EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1 Dolby D (2ch) Multi Channel Dolby D (2ch Surr) Multi Channel

DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital + DolbyDigital +

II II II II II II

Stereo Stereo Stereo

Stereo

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O

SLSRSBL

SubW

SBR

---

---Odts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

---Odts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---Odts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---Odts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

---OPCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---ODSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

---ODSD L, R

---OPCM L, R

---OPCM, HDCD L, R

---OANALOG -

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, R

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,LFE

2

DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,S,LFE

2

DIGITAL L,C,R,SL,SR,S,LFE

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

DIGITAL

2

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL L, R

O

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

O

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL

O

2

DIGITAL

O

2

DIGITAL

O

2

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

-

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

2

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

Surround Mode Input Signal Decoding

Multi Ch. Movie Music

(O): Movie mode only. Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby H.P

THX (AUTO)

THX Ultra2 (THX EX) (THX Cinema) (THX Music) (THX Games)

DTS-ES DTS-ES DTS 96/24 DTS-96/24 DTS (5.1ch) DTS 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM SA-CD (2ch) Multi Channel PCM (Audio) Multi Channel HDCD Multi Channel Analog Multi Channel

Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch) Dolby H.P Dolby D (2ch Surr) Dolby H.P Dolby Digital Plus (5.1) Dolby Digital Plus (6.1) Dolby Digital Plus (7.1) Dolby TrueHD (5.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (6.1) Stereo Dolby TrueHD (7.1) Stereo DTS-ES Dolby H.P DTS 96/24 Dolby H.P DTS (5.1ch) Dolby H.P DTS-HD (5.1) Stereo DTS-HD (6.1) Stereo DTS-HD (7.1) Stereo Multi Ch-PCM Dolby H.P SA-CD (5.1ch) Dolby H.P SA-CD (2ch) Dolby H.P PCM (Audio) Dolby H.P HDCD Dolby H.P Analog Dolby H.P Dolby Surr.EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby D (2ch) Dolby D (2ch Surr) DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX DTS (5.1ch) DTS + THX 5.1 Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1 SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) HDCD Analog Dolby Surr.EX Dolby D (5.1ch) Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX

Dolby D (2ch) Dolby D (2ch Surr) DTS-ES DTS-ES + THX DTS (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM Multi Ch-PCM + THX

SA-CD (5.1ch) Multi Ch-PCM + THX

SA-CD (2ch) PCM (Audio) HDCD Analog

Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz

Stereo Stereo Stereo

Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1 Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX

Ultra2 Cinema Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

DTS + THX

Ultra

2 Cinema

Ultra2 Cinema

Ultra2 Cinema Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX Pro Logic IIx movie + THX

Notes:

• Surround modes other than Stereo are not available during Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD playback.

If surround modes other than Stereo are selected

and Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, or DTSHD content is played, the surround mode setting is disabled.

Output Channel Front information display

L/R C

O (O) O O O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O (O) O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O OOOOO OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOO-O OOO-O OOO-O OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO

OOOOO OOOOO OOOOO

SLSRSBL

SubW

SBR

-

----2 DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, R

----2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

----2 DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

----2 DIGITAL

- - - - dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - dts L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

- - - - PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

- - - - DSD L, R

- - - - PCM L, R

- - - - PCM, HDCD L, R

- - - - ANALOG -

Signal format indicators Channel status

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

O

dts 96/24 L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

O

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup Depend on speaker setup

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

DIGITAL EX L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

2

DIGITAL L, R

2

DIGITAL 2 SURROUND L, R, S

2

dts, ES L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE dts L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE PCM L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE

DSD L, R PCM L, R PCM, HDCD L, R ANALOG -

Abbreviations L/R : Front speakers C : Center speaker SL/SR : Surround speakers SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers SubW : Subwoofer

42

ENGLISH

AUTO

When this mode is selected, the unit determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby T rueHD , DTS-HD, DTS, DTS-ES, DTS 96/24 or PCM audio. Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES auto trigger ﬂ ag in the digital signal. When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the number of channels for which the corresponding signal is encoded will be played. Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with Dolby surround status automatically subjects that signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play. PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this mode.

Notes:

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed to AUTO mode automatically. See page 41 to conﬁ rm the available decoding modes.

SOURCE DIRECT

In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit Acoustic EQ. and bass management conﬁ guration are bypassed for full-range frequency response and the purist audio reproduction.

Notes:

• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center = LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer = YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and additional processing are deactivated.

• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD players, performing operations such as skip or stop may momentarily interrupt the output.

• In SOURCE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and M-DAX are not available.

PURE DIRECT

The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode, by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and turning the FL display off.

Note:

• In PURE DIRECT mode, ACOUSTIC EQ and MDAX are not available.

EX/ES

This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material such as DVD. This mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Dolby Digital EX In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called surround back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever bef ore . Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do not have without surround back speak er(s).

DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1) DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic positioning, and makes acoustic image movement more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction. This unit incorporates a DTS-ES-decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program sources from DVD, etc. DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete recording of all channels, including the surround back channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction. DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have surround back speakers.

Dolby MODE

(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic IIx MUSIC, Pro Logic

This mode is used with source materials encoded in Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.

DOLBY DIGIT AL

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in Dolby Digital. Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Eff ect channel. Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this mode.

Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes: Pro Logic IIx MOVIE This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie soundtracks.

Pro Logic

This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or digital), such as CD, tape , FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc. Pro Logic IIx GAME This mode surround effects by routing them to the system’s subwoofer .

5.1ch + Pro Logic

This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from

5.1 channel sources

5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.

Notes:

• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II

mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 30)

• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

II

x GAME)

II

x MUSIC

restores the impact low-frequency

II

x Movie

movie soundtracks

.

dts

dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2 channel sources.

dts

This mode is enabled when playing source materials encoded in dts multichannel. Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts sources provides five main audio channels (left, center, right, surround left and surround right) and a Low Frequency Eff ects channel. dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode. The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog input has been selected.

Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music

This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology . The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties in the frequency characteristics of the channels as well as in channel separation. According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6 uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized for music playbac k.

Note:

The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input

• signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

CIRCLE SURROUND II

II

-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)

(CS

Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel surround sound playback of non-encoded and multichannel encoded material. Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to

6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire collection of music and ﬁ lm, including broadcast, videotape and stereo recorded music. Depending on source material, you can select CSII- Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono mode.

Note:

• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or PCM format.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

43

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

STEREO

FUNCTION

This mode bypasses all surround processing. In stereo program sources, the left and right channels play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is input. With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels

CONNECTIONS SETUP

are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM source material can be played back in stereo mode.

Dolby Virtual Speaker

Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual surround sound ﬁ eld using only two speakers for the front channels, allowing the user to experience sound as if surround speakers were actually being used.

MULTI CH. (MOVIE, MUSIC)

This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more natural soundstage from two channel source material. This is done by feeding the left channel signal to

OPERATION

both the left front and left surround speakers and the

BASIC

right channel signal to both the right front and right surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.

Note:

OPERATION

• Audio is not output from the CENTER channel

ADVANCED

when using MUL TI CH. MUSIC mode.

THX CINEMA

THX Cinema mode applies additional processing to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multichannel, surround sources. The THX processing

CONTROLLER

was developed by THX Ltd. to recreate the sound of

REMOTE

top-quality theater. Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc, tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround EX mode is not available.

TROUBLESHOOTING

THX SURROUND EX

In a movie theater, ﬁ lm soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels.

OTHERS

This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever bef ore .

THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel source whenever THX is active. THX Surround EX is not available in system without surround back speaker(s).

Note:

• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the THX Surround EX mode.

THX ULTRA2 CINEMA

THX ULTRA2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sound. This mode permits the playback of a non Surround EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected, if the appropriate ﬂ ag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital ﬂ ag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX ULTRA2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay.

THX MUSIC

For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all

5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage. This mode is to be used with multichannel music sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital

5.1 music.

Notes:

• These modes are only available when you have setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround back speakers).

• These modes are only available when the input signal has surround left and surround right contents.

THX GAMES

For the replay of stereo and multichannel game audio the THX Games mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360-degree playback environment. THX Games mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround ﬁ eld.

Neural Surround

Neural SurroundTM represents the latest advancement in surround technology developed f or m usic. Neural Surround frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multichannel surround playback.

TM

employs psychoacoustic

CAUTION

Note for DTS

•

To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD player needs to support DTS digital output. You may not be able to play some DTS source signals from certain CD players and LD players even if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response), and the unit cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.

• Depending on the player used, DTS play may produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.

• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are playing in another surround mode, you cannot switch to digital input or from digital input to analog input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU or by pressing the A/D button.

• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a ZONE.

•

The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT, TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.

Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX

•

When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the EX/ES mode.

• Note that some Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded software does not contain the identiﬁ cation signal. In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.

Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio

•

The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be used when playing PCM signals with a sampling frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/ Audio discs).

•

Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

•

Some DVD discs f eature cop y protection. When using such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation manual.

Note for HDCD

•

HDCD is effective only through digital input.

•

You may not be able to play some HDCD source signals from certain CD players if you connect the player to the unit digitally. This is because the digital signal has been processed (such as the output level, sampling frequency or frequency response) and the unit cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.

44

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M

M-DAX

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M -DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBA NDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

NAV PR E TUNER AV8003

TENTER

AD VANCED

RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE

In normal operation, the audio or video source

OPERATION

selected for listening through this unit is sent to the record outputs.

DISPLAY MODE

DISP DISPLAY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

E DIRECT

-DAX

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

You can select the display mode for the front display of the unit.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

This means that any program you are watching or listening to may be recorded simply by placing machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in the record mode.

To recor d the input source signal you are currently watching or listening to

1.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

1.

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

To select this mode, press the DISPLAY button on the front panel, or switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the DISPLAY button. When this button is pressed, the display mode is switched in the following sequence .

Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF → Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode

Normal Mode:

Displays the selected input function. If the function has been renamed using the Function Rename feature (see page 25), the renamed name appears on the display.

Input Mode:

Displays the input mode set via the Function Input Setup feature (see page 24).

Surround Mode:

Displays the status of the selected surround mode.

Auto Display Off mode:

The display is off. But, if you make a change to the unit such as the input or surround mode, the display will show that change, then go back to off after about 3 seconds.

Display Off mode:

The display is off completely.

Note:

• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the front display in display off condition.

1. To select the input source for recording, turn the INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the front panel or press the HOME button and then the appropriate numeric buttons 1 through 9 on the remote controller.

The input source is now selected and you may

watch or listen to it as desired.

The currently selected input source signal

2.

is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for

recording.

Start recording to the recording component as

3.

desired.

Notes:

• When connecting only digital signal input, output cannot be made to the TAPEOUT, CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, or DSS/VCR2 OUT terminals. When using recording functions, be sure to also make connections for analog signal input.

• No conversion is made from Video signal input to S-Video signal output or from S-Video signal input to Video signal output. Always use the same signal type for both input and output.

• Video or audio signals input to HDMI input terminals cannot be recorded.

SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT

If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you can temporarily select the audio input mode for each input source as following procedures. Switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 002 is displa yed. Then press the A/D button. When this button is pressed, the input mode is switched in the following sequence .

Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto Auto mode:

The types of signals being input to the digital and analog input jacks for the selected input source are detected automatically. If no digital signal is being input, the analog input jacks are selected automatically.

HDMI mode:

HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI input has been assigned as an input source. When “HDMI AUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI mode cannot be selected.

Digital mode:

The input signal is ﬁ xed to an assigned digital input terminal.

Analog mode:

The analog input jacks are selected.

This selection is temporary and will not be stored in memory. T o store changes to the input mode , select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 24)

LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES

This jack may be used to listen to the unit’s output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono plug. Note that the speakers will automatically be turned off when the headphone jack is in use.

AV PRE TU

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

Notes:

• When using headphones, the surround mode will change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by MENU and Cursor button.

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the jack.

• The 7.1ch input mode returns to the previous setting as soon as the headphone plug is inserted to the jack.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

EN

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

45

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

TAV P RE TUNER AV8003

EENTER

DISPLAY

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODEBANDEXITMENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

HDMI

.

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE

This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual sounds heard from the speakers. When headphones are used, the MENU button automatically switches to the Dolby headphone mode.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

The OSD that appears when the MENU button is pressed is shown below .

HEAD PHONE

DOLBY HP MODE :DH SURROUND :PL

L LEVEL :+10.0dB R LEVEL : 0.0dB

DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected with the left and right cursor buttons. BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS

OPERATION

BASIC

BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode

and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.

DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing

system that delivers a sound similar to room speakers.

It makes it possible to experience the

OPERATION

ADVANCED

volume and space of a 5-channel surround system using ordinary stereo headphones.

When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is displayed as the mode indication.

CONTROLLER

The surround mode can be selected when the

REMOTE

modes in DH is selected. L/R LEVEL can be set in the ±12 dB range.

Notes:

• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as

TROUBLESHOOTING

soon as the plug is removed from the jack.

• In headphone mode, Tone Control and ACOUSTIC EQ are not available.

II MV

ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL

If the selected analog audio input signal is greater than the capable level of internal processing, the “PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If this happens, switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Then press the ATT button. “ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by about half. Attenuation will not work with the output signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and DSS/VCR2-OUT. This function is memorized for each individual input source.

7.1 CH INPUT

This unit is equipped for future expansion through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD multichannel player or DVD-Audio player. When this is selected, the input signals connected to the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL (surround left), SR (surround right) and SBL (surround back left) and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1 CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and right), center, surround (left and right) and surround back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks without passing through the surround circuitry. In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer) jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack. When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs. This permits simultaneous viewing with video sources

1. 2.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE

DIRECT

PHONES

2.

3.

AV PRE

HDMI

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

MEMORY

T-MODE

P

DISPLAY

M-DAX

≠

4.

UP

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

2

3

1. Select a desired Video source to decide the routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.

Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front

2.

panel or switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. Then press 7.1 CH IN on the remote controller to switch to 7.1 channel input.

If it is necessary to adjust the output level of

3.

each channel, press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Press the CH SELECT button on the remote controller.

Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can

hear the same sound level from each speaker at the listening position. For the front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right and surround back speakers, the output levels can be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.

The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18

and +12 dB.

These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1

CH. INPUT memory.

Adjust the main volume with the MAIN VOLUME

4.

knob or the VOL + / – buttons on the remote controller.

To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT, press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH IN on the remote controller.

Notes:

• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select a surround mode, as the external decoder determines processing.

• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.

• Furthermore, the following functions are not available during 7.1 CH Input use.

Test Tone, NIGHT MODE, Source Direct, Pure

Direct, RE-EQ, T one Control, Multi EQ.

OTHERS

46

3.

3

4

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

AUX INPUT

If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals with multi channel decoder, L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are available as AUX input. In this case, You can connect additional audio source to AUX as other audio input terminals.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

To select AUX, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel, or press HOME button and press 6 button on remote controller.

VIDEO ON/OFF

When no video signal is connected to the unit or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV, the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting. To select video off, switch the remote controller to AMP mode and press the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Then press the VIDEO OFF button.

V-OFF

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION

This function allows the component connected to the TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to the unit.

AUTO POWER ON

1. Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Ref er to page 34)

Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-

2.

VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the VIDEO input.

Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the

3.

unit.

T urn ON the TV TUNER and tune in a receiv able

4.

station.

When the station is received, this unit turns ON

5.

and TV is selected automatically.

AUTO POWER OFF

1. In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF or select a channel that does not contain any broadcast.

The power to the unit switches to STANDBY

2.

after approx. 5 min utes.

Notes:

• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if this unit is set to a source other than TV.

The function reactivates when TV is selected again.

• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO FUNCTION to turn ON.

• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO ON/OFF” function.

• This function is inactive when STANDBY MODE is set to ECONOMY. To use this function, set STANDBY MODE to NORMAL.

LIP.SYNC

Depending on the image device (TV, monitor, projector, etc.) connected to the unit a time lag can occur between image signal processing and audio signal processing. Though minor, this time lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment. The LIP. SYNC feature delays the audio signal with respect to the image signal output from the unit to correct the time lag between the sound and image. It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and 2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. To select Lip-sync mode, set the remote controller to the AMP mode, press the < / > button until 002 is displayed. Press the LIP. SYNC button. The initial setting is OFF (0 ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up to 200 ms. Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV, monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.

Note:

• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically restored.

• Even if you do not correct the time lag manually this way, audio and video are automatically synchronized when the unit is connected to TV or Projector supporting Auto Lipsync Correction in HDMI 1.3a. For instructions on Auto Lipsync Correction, see page 35.

DUAL BACKUP MEMORY

The unit stores settings information in nonvolatile memory even when the main power supply is turned off. Using the Dual Backup Memory function, you can write settings information to another memory area to back up saved settings for recovery anytime as needed.

BACKUP

Set up the unit in the state for which you want to store the settings. Hold the MEMORY and ENTER buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

“MEMORY SAVING” is displayed and the unit’s settings are saved. The stored settings information is retained until Dual Backup Memory is used again and the information is overwritten.

MEMORY SAVING

Note:

• The following settings values cannot be backed up.

• Main Zone Volume

• Zone Volume

• Zone Speaker Volume

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

The “V-OFF” indicator on the main unit display panel will light.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

47

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENU

ZONE

ENTER

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

.

. .

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

U

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

RECOVERY OF MEMORY

FUNCTION

Recover backed up settings as follows. Hold the MEMORY and MENU buttons on the front panel simultaneously for at least 3 seconds.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

RE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

TO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

T

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

TUNER OPERATION

TO SELECTING THE TUNER

(Using the unit)

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

3.

2.

LISTENING TO THE TUNER

3

2 1

≠

AUTO TUNING

1.

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

3. 2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

“MEMORY LOAD” is displayed and the unit’s stored settings are reapplied. The unit temporarily enters standby mode. If there is no backup data, “NO BACKUP” is displayed and no data is recovered.

OPERATION

BASIC

Note:

• Because the following settings values are

OPERATION

not backed up, each Volume value is set to

ADVANCED

Minimum.

• Main Zone Volume

• Zone Volume

• Zone Speaker Volume

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

48

MEMORY LOAD

NO BACKUP

To select TUNER, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

There are three ways to select TUNER.

1

2.

Press the HOME button

1.

Press the 4 button.

2.

4.

4

1. Press the HOME button. Press the < / > button until 002 is display ed.

2.

Press the 4.TUNER button.

3.

Press the 4.TUNER button.

4.

2.

2

1

≠

4.

3.

1. Press the HOME button. Press the AMP button.

2.

Press the < / > button until 008 is display ed.

3.

Press the TUNER button.

4.

4

3

3.

2.

3

2 4

4

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

1.

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

2.

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

3.

Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto tuning function.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

4.

station is tuned in.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 001 is display ed.

2.

Press the FM or AM button.

3.

Press and hold the 3 or 4 cursor button for 1

4.

second or more.

5. Automatic searching begins then stops when a station is tuned in.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

Note:

DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL

The same operations performed using the 3/ 4 buttons can be performed using the – TUNE + button of item 002 when the remote controller is in TUNER mode.

3.

3

If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the “Manual Tuning” operation.

MANUAL TUNING

2.

1.

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

AUTO

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

3. 2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

2.

3.

3

4.

5.

6.

2.

2 4

(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)

4

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

1.

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select either FM or

2.

AM.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

3.

Panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 001 is display ed.

2.

3.

4.

Press the FM or AM button. Press the 3

deseired station.

or

4 cursor buttons to tune in the

4.

5.

Press the < / > button until 001 is displayed. Press the FM or AM button. Press the GUIDE button on the remote

controller, display will show “FREQ----”. lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the

ten numbered keypad on the remote The desired station will automatically be tuned.

AUTO, TUNED, ST T-MODE

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

TOP

ENTER

3.

2.

2

controller

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

DISPLAY

M-DAX

3

2

In TUNER mode, press the T-MODE button on the remote controller to switch between A UTO STEREO and monaural sound.

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button on the remote controller

2.

to display 002.

Each time the T-MODE button is pressed,

3.

the TUNER mode changes and the mode is displayed on the FL display.

Analog / Digital Auto Mode

T-MODE:DIG-AT

For listening to HD Radio stations. See p.52 for more information on HD Radio technology.

Analog Auto Mode (when receiving FM broadcasts)

T-MODE:ANA-AT

AUTO STEREO mode is selected and the AUTO indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

When stereo broadcasts are received, the ST indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

Note:

.

• This mode is not available when BAND is set to AM.

Analog Mono Mode

T-MODE:MONO

MONO mode is selected and the AUTO indicator disappears from the FL display . Monaur al broadcasts are received in TUNER mode .

Note:

• If the unit receives a weak signal or it is difﬁ cult to receive a stereo signal, press the T-MODE button on the remote controller or the unit to switch to MONO mode. This reduces the amount of noise and makes broadcasts easier to hear. The AUTO indicator on the FL display disappears.

PRESET MEMORY

With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations in any order. For each station, you can memorize the frequency and reception mode if desired.

AUTO PRESET MEMORY

This function automatically scans the FM and AM band and enters all stations with proper signal strength into the memory.

2. 4.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

1. To select FM , press the BAND button on the front panel.

While pressing the MEMORY button, press the

2.

1 cursor button.

“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,

and scanning starts from the lowest frequency .

3. Each time the tuner ﬁ nds a station, scanning will pause and the station will be played for ﬁ ve seconds.

During this time, the following operations are

possible. The band can be changed by the BAND button.

4. If no button is pressed during this period, the current station is memorized in location Preset

02.

If you wish to skip the current station, press the

3 cursor button during this period, this station is skipped and auto presetting continues.

Operation stops automatically when all 60

5.

preset memory positions are ﬁ lled or when auto scanning attains the highest end of all bands. If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at anytime, press the CLEAR button.

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

MENU

3.5.2.

1.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

49

NAMES AND

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

MANUAL PRESET MEMORY

FUNCTION

3.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

(Using the unit)

Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

1.

OPERATION

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

2.

BASIC

Select the preset number by pressing the 1

3.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The

4.

The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

(Using the remote controller)

CONTROLLER

1. Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to

REMOTE

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

2.

Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed in

3.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Press the MEMORY button on the remote

4.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

5.

Note:

• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

OTHERS

50

ENGLISH

2. 4.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

HDMI

4.

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

or 2

cursor

(approx. 5 seconds)

display stops blinking.

memory location.

the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING” section).

TUNER mode.

controller. “– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

the numeric buttons.

either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

3.

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

5.

buttons, while this is still blinking

RECALLING A PRESET STATION

4

(Using the unit)

Select the desired preset station by pressing

1.

3

the 1 or 2

cursor

buttons on the front panel.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the 1 or 2 cursor buttons to tune in the

2.

deseired preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

Note:

The same operations performed using the 1 or 2 buttons can be performed using the CH +/- buttons when the remote controller is in TUNER mode.

PRESET SCAN

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed and

2.

press the P-SCAN button on the remote.

“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display

and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

3. Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1 → No.2 → etc.) f or 10 seconds each.

No stored preset number will be skipped.

2.2.

You can fast forward the preset stations, press

4.

the 2 cursor button continuously.

When the desired preset station is received,

5.

4. Up to 10 channels can be displayed at a time. If there are more than 10 channels, press P-INFO button on the remote controller once more to display the next page.

The list display will disappear automatically in 5

seconds.

cancel the preset scan operation by pressing the CLEAR button or P-SCAN button on the remote controller.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory

PRESET CHANNEL LIST DISPLAY

A complete list of the broadcast channels stored in this unit can be displayed.

2. 4.

2. 4

using the following procedure.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

TOP

ENTER

3.2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2.2.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press < / > on the remote controller to display

2.

002, then press P-INFO button.

2.5.2.5.

2.2.

4.

5.

The list of preset channels will be displayed on

3.

the screen of the TV monitor connected to this unit.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

RETURN NEXT EXIT

On the unit, multicast channels are also

displayed, as shown below, when an HD Radio channel is set to the preset channels.

PRESET LIST

NO. 1 FM 87.10 MHz NO. 2 FM 93.10 MHz NO. 3 FM 94.70 MHz NO. 4 FM 94.70 MHz-3 NO. 5 FM 94.70 MHz-4 NO.10 FM105.70 MHz

In the list of preset channels above, preset

numbers 4 and 5 are the multicast channels for preset number 3.

2.

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

2.

or press the MEMORY button on the remote . The stored preset number blinks in the display

3.

for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote controller.

4. “xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate that the specified preset number has been cleared.

Note:

To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

•

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

2

3

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

SORTING PRESET STATIONS

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in the sequential order: I.e. the stations are stored as follows

1) 87.1 MHz

2) 93.1 MHz

3) 94.7 MHz

10) 105.9 MHz (notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 4: To sort the numbers, press the 4 cursor button while holding down the MEMORY b utton. “PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and sorting will be done.

HDMI

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

M-DAX

NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.

This function allows the name of each preset channel

UP

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

DISPLAY

to be entered using alphanumeric characters. Before name inputting, you need to store preset stations with the preset memory operation.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

5. 2. 5. 6.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

4.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

DIRECT

PHONES

5. After selecting the ﬁ rst character to be entered, press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press the MEMORY button on the remote controller.

The entr y in this column is ﬁ xed and the next

column starts to ﬂ ash. Fill the next column the same way.

To mo ve back and forth between the characters,

press the 1 / 2 cursor buttons on the front panel or the remote controller.

Note:

• Unused columns should be filled by entering blanks.

To save the name, press the MEMORY or

6.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

ENTER button on the front panel, or press the MEMORY button on the remote controller for

more than 2 seconds.

Instead of using the 3 and 4 cursor buttons

or the on the front panel remote controller to select characters, characters can be input from the numeric keys of the remote controller. See

2.5.6.2.5.6.

the below table for a correspondence between characters and numeric keys.

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

4.

5.5.

4.

1. Recall the preset number to be inputted name with the method described in “Recalling” a preset station.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

2.

or press the MEMORY button on the remote controller for more than 3 seconds.

The left most column of the station name

3.

Ten keypad Press, press again, press again, etc.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

A → B → C → 1 → A D → E → F → 2 → D G → H → I → 3 → G J → K → L → 4 → J M → N → O → 5 → M P → Q → R → 6 → P S → T → U → 7 → S V → W → X → 8 → V Y → Z → space → 9 → Y – → + → / → 0

indicator ﬂ ashes, indicating the character entry ready status.

When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on

4.

the front panel or the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the remote controller, alphabetic and numeric characters will be displayed in the following order:

TROUBLESHOOTING

A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +

→ / → (Blank) → A

UP → → DOWN

OTHERS

51

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

R

SPHONES

THX

M-DAX

LCLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

UVO LUME

UP

A

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

.3

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

FOR LISTENING TO HD Radio STATIONS

HD Radio technology brings digital radio to conventional analog AM and FM radio stations, with improved sound quality, better reception, and new data services.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

HD Radio technology provides CD-quality sound for FM stations, and FM-quality sound for AM stations. In addition, FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs on the same frequency by using multicast channels. Text data display incudes station name, song title, artist name, and so on. For more information about HD Radio technology, visit: www.ibiquity.com

TUNING MODE

HD Radio stations transmit analog and digital signals for broadcast programs. You can change the TUNING mode to the desired

OPERATION

signal type.

BASIC

ADVANCED

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

OPERATION

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button on the remote controller

2.

Each time the T-MODE button is pressed,

3.

OTHERS

52

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

3.

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

3

2

to display 002.

the TUNER mode changes and the mode is displayed on the FL display.

Analog/Digital Auto Mode

T-MODE:DIG-AT

Use this mode when listening to HD Radio stations. (It is recommended that you normally use this mode.) AUTO STEREO mode is selected and the AUTO indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

When stereo broadcasts are received, the ST indicator is illuminated on the FL display. When an HD Radio (digital) signal is received, the DIGITAL indicator is illuminated on the FL display.

Note:

In this mode, if the strength of the HD Radio signal is weak, the unit automatically changes to Analog mode to receive the analog signal.

Analog Auto Mode (when receiving FM broadcasts)

T-MODE:ANA-AT

In this mode, the unit receives only analog signals and changes to AUT O STEREO mode. See p.49 for more information on Analog received. (Only analog broadcasts are received.)

Notes:

• In this mode, HD Radio signals cannot be received. (Only analog broadcasts are received.)

• This mode is not available when BAND is set to AM.

Analog Mono Mode

T-MODE:MONO

In this mode, the unit receives only analog signals and changes to Monaural mode. See p.49 for more information on Analog Mono Mode.

Note:

In this mode, HD Radio signals cannot be received. (Only analog broadcasts are received.)

HD RADIO AUTO TUNING

1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

UTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

E

THX

INPUT

CT

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

You can use TUNING mode to scan for HD Radio stations.

(Using the unit)

Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

1.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

2.

station is tuned in.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the ENTER button on the remote

2.

controller.

Automatic searching begins then stops when a

3.

station is tuned in.

Notes:

• When TUNING mode is set to a mode other than Analog/Digital Auto mode (DIG-AT), TUNING mode automatically changes to Analog/Digital Auto mode.

• If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use manual tuning. (See p.49 for the manual tuning operation.)

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOL

C

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

SWITCHING HD-RADIO INFORMATION INTHE FRONT PANEL FL DISPLAY

You can displayHD Radio information(such as stationname,artistname/songtitleorsignalstatus) forthe channel currently selected in the front panel FLdisplay.

.

2.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button until 004 is displayed.

2.

Select the information with the DISPLAY

3.

button.

Auto display mode Text 1 (artist name) Text 2 (song title) HD Radio signal strength Frequency

When the auto display mode is displayed:

FM WXYZ-FM 1

When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station, the station name (call sign) is displayed on the FL display.

Notes:

• The station name is displayed if the text data from the HD Radio station can be received. If the signal from the radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

If the text data cannot be received, the frequency

is displayed. The station name is displayed if it has been registered with the preset station name input function.

(See p.51 for information on the PRESET STATION

NAME INPUT function.)

3

2

H

D

ENGLISH

. . .

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

PDISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

RMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

U

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

• When the unit receives a broadcast with multicast channels, the multicast program number (

H

D 1) is

displayed to the right of the station name displayed on the FL display.

H

When (

D 1) is displayed, you can select the multicast

channel. (See p.53 for information on multicast channels.)

When the Text 1 (Artist name) is displayed:

TXT1

↓

Pink Floid

The “TXT1” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the artist’s name. If ar tist’s name is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit receives an analog broadcast not from an HD Radio station but from an RBDS station, the radio text is displayed on the FL display. (See p.54 for information on RBDS.)

WhentheText2(Songtitle)isdisplayed:

TXT2

↓

Money

The “TXT 2” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the song title. If song title is more than 13 char acters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit receives an analog broadcast not from an HD Radio station but from an RBDS station, the program service name is displayed on the FL display. (See p.54 for information on RBDS.)

CHECKINGTHEHDRadioSIGNALSTRENGTH

HD SIG:777777

• The HD Radio signal strength of the FL display changes as shown below according to the receiving condition.

HD SIG: ■■■■■■ SIGNAL: STR ONG (Signal strength is good)

HD SIG: ■■■■ SIGNAL: MARGINAL (Signal strength is Marginal)

HD SIG: ■■ SIGNAL: WEAK (Signal strength is poor)

HD SIG: SIGNAL: NON (Loss of the signal)

ThisTUNERinformationcanalsobedisplayedona TV-monitorconnectedtotheunit.

2 3 4

1. Switch the remote controller to AMP mode. Press the INFO button. The following information

2.

display will be output.

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :FM

SURR-MODE :AUTO

ZONEA:OFF SPK:OFF ZONEB:OFF SPK:OFF MAIN VOLUME

------------------

3. When this display appears, press the INFO

button again. TUNER information like the following will appear.

TUNER INFORMATION

FREQ:FM 100.10MHz WXYZ-FM TXT1:Pink floid TXT2:Money PTY :Rock

HD-SIG:MARGINAL

4. Press the INFO button again. The information

display will go out.

Note:

• When the entire TXT1 or TXT2 character string cannot be displayed at once, the display changes to scrolling display. If text data cannot be received, “---” is displayed.

SELECTING MULTICAST CHANNELS

FM HD Radio stations can transmit multiple programs on the same frequency by using what are called MULTICAST CHANNELS.

1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

RE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

TO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

T

SETUP MIC

ENTER

(Using the unit)

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front

1.

panel to select the desired Multicast Channel.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to tune in the

2.

deseired Multicast channel.

When the unit receives multicast channels, the

multicast program number ( the right of the station name displayed on the FL display.

FM WXYZ-FM 2

• This function is not available for AM HD Radio stations because they cannot broadcast multicast channels.

• If the received HD Radio station have multicast channels, the unit scans for frequencies as shown below.

HDMI

MEMO

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DIS

M-DAX

H

2) is displayed to

D

2 2

H

D

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

53

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

Example:

FUNCTION

When two multicast channels are broadcast by an HD Radio station at 100.10 MHz

Unit receives 99.90 MHz.

1.

↓ (Press 3 cursor.)

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Unit receives the main channel of the HD Radio

2.

station at 100.10 MHz.

↓ (Press 3 cursor.)

Unit receives multicast channel 1 at 100.10

3.

MHz.

↓ (Press 3 cursor.)

Unit receives multicast channel 2 at 100.10

4.

MHz.

↓ (Press 3 cursor.)

Unit receives 100.30 MHz.

5.

(The station at 100.10 MHz does not have a

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

third multicast channel, so the next frequency (100.30 MHz) is received.)

Notes:

• If digital audio data cannot be received after the station is selected, or if the station signal is weak, the unit may not be able to receive the multicast channels.

• If the station signal is weak, the digital audio of the multicast channel may cut out. In this case, “LOADING” is displayed on the FL display.

• If the digital signal of the multicast channel cannot be received, “OFF AIR” is displayed on the FL display and the main channel is selected.

• Multicast channels cannot be received on AM broadcasts.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

54

PTY AUTO SEARCH

You can use the Program Type information search function for some HD Radio stations. See PTY A UT O SEARCH on p.55.

RBDS OPERATION

RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data System) is a description of the station’s programming hidden space in the FM signal. Your new unit is equipped with RBDS to assist in the selection of FM stations using station and network names, rather than broadcast frequencies. Additional RBDS functions include the ability to search for programme types.

Note:

When the unit is receiving an HD Radio (digital) signal, the HD Radio text data is displayed instead of the RBDS data.

RADIO TEXT

Some RBDS stations broadcast RADIO TEXT, which is additional information on the station and programme being broadcast. RADIO TEXT information appears as ‘running’ text in the display. RADIO TEXT is transmitted character by the radio station. As a result of that it may take some time until the entire text has been completely received.

RBDS DISPLAY

When a unit is tuned to an FM station that is transmitting RBDS data, the Front Panel Information Display will automatically show the call sign or RBDS TEXT in place of the typical display of the station’s broadcast frequency. To change the display, press the TUNER button and press the the < / > button until 004 is displayed. Select the information with the DISPLAY button.

Auto display mode Text 1 (Radio Text) Text 2 (Program Service name) HD Radio signal strength Frequency

When the auto display mode is displayed:

FM WXYZ

When the unit is tuned to an RBDS station, the station name (call sign) is displayed on the FL display.

Notes:

When the unit receives the RDBS text data from a station, the station name is displayed. If the signal from the radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

If the text data cannot be received, the frequency is displayed. You can use the preset station name input function to register the station name. The registered station name is then displayed.

(See p.51 for information on the PRESET STATION NAME INPUT function.)

When the Text 1 (Radio Text) is displayed:

TXT1

↓

Pink Floid

The “TXT1” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the Radio Text (R T). If RT is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station, the artist name is displayed on the FL display. (See p.52 for information on HD Radio technology.)

When the Text 2(Program service name) is displayed:

TXT2

↓

Money

The “TXT 2” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the Program Service (PS). If PS is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.

Notes:

• If the signal from an radio station is weak, text data may be displayed intermittently or not all.

• When the unit is tuned to an HD Radio station, the song title is displayed on the FL display.

(See p.52 for information on HD Radio technology.)

CHECKINGTHEHDRadioSIGNALSTRENGTH

HD SIG:

• The signal strength is only displayed when the unit is tuned to a digital HD Radio station. “SIGNAL: NON” is displayed when receiving an analog signal.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HHDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

. . .

.

• Y ou can view the tuner information on a TV monitor when connected to the unit. (See p.13, 14 for the operation details.)

PTY AUTO SEARCH

Your unit is equipped to automatically search for stations transmitting any of 29 different programme types. To search for a PTY, follow these procedures:

1.

2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

Press the PTY button in the TUNER MODE on

1.

the remote controller. The current station’ s PTY will be displayed, or the currently selected PTY group will be displayed in blinking if no station or RBDS data is present.

To change to a new PTY type, press the

2.

TUNING 3 or 4 button on the front panel or numeric buttons on the remote controller until

the desired PTY is shown in the display.

3. Once the desired PTY group or type has

been selected, press the PTY button while the display blink (approx. 5 seconds). The PTY Auto search will start, and the tuner will

3.

4.

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

M-DAX

NUMBER DISPLAY PROGRAMME TYPE

1 NEWS News 2 INFORM Information 3 SPORTS Sports 4 TALK Talk 5 ROCK Rock 6 CLS ROCK Classic Rock 7 ADLT HIT Adult Hits 8 SOFT RCK Soft Rock 9 TOP 40 Top 40

10 COUNTRY Country

11 OLDIES Oldies

12 SOFT Soft

1 3 4

13 NOSTALGA Nostalgia 14 JAZZ Jazz 15 CLASSICL Classical 16 R & B Rhythm and Blues 17 SOFT R&B Soft Rhythm and Blues 18 LANGUAGE Foreign Language 19 REL MUSC Religious Music 20 REL TALK Religious Talk

2

21 PERSNLTY Personality 22 PUBLIC Public 23 COLLEGE College 24 WEATHER Weather 25 ALERT! Emergency 26 TRAFFIC Trafﬁ c 27 GOVERMNT Government 28 EMERGNCY Emergency 29 READSVCS Radio Reading Services 30 PRIVSVCS Private Services

XM RADIO OVERVIEW

This unit is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.

About XM Radio

XM is North America’s number one satellite radio company , offering an e xtraordinary variety of commercial-free music, plus the best in premier sports, news, talk radio, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming, broadcast in superior digital audio quality coast to coast. For more information, or to subscribe, U.S. customers visit xmradio.com or call XM Listener Care at 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346); Canadian customers visit xmradio.ca or call XM Listener Care at 1-877-GETXMSR (1-877-438-9677).

XM Ready

XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock required (each sold separately) to receive XM service. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make availab le an y technology or softw are incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM satellite Radio System. Installation costs and other f ees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply . All f ees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent e xplicit language are indicated with an XL. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO (U.S. residents) and 1-877-GETXMSR (Canadian residents). Only available in the 48 contiguous United States and Canada. ©2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

XM Ready

Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniT uner Home Dock to y our XM Ready begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to ﬁ nd your eight character XM Radio ID: On the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the Radio ID below for reference.

Note:

Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://activate.xmradio.com or call 1-800XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in Canada online at https://activate. xmradio.ca or call 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10-15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep y our XM Ready audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready audio system you are done.

®

Legal

®

Subscription

®

audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and

The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I”, “O”, “S” or “F”.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

pause at each station broadcasting RBDS PTY information corresponding to the selected choice.

To advance to the next RBDS station with the

4.

desired PTY, press the PTY button again within 5 seconds.

Notes:

TROUBLESHOOTING

• Not all RBDS stations and HD Radio stations broadcast PTY information.

• PTY AUTO SEARCH may not function for stations with weak signals if the unit is unable to detect the information needed for the search.

OTHERS

55

ENGLISH

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

T

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HHDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio , you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

1.

PURE DIRECT

2.

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

2.

OPERATION

BASIC

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

1.

“TUNER”.

CONTROLLER

Press the BAND button to select either XM.

2.

REMOTE

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 001 is displayed.

2.

TROUBLESHOOTING

Select XM button.

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

HDMI

DOWN

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID

3. Adjust the antenna location until signal strength is good.

Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or 4

4.

cursor buttons of the unit or remote controller.

2.

2

1.

2

1. Press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. Press the SAT DISP button three times to

2.

display the signal status on the front display of

2

T OR

UND

1

E

• The Radio ID is displayed.

the unit.

UP

VOLUME

CLEAR

SIGNAL:

• The display changes as shown below according to

the receiving condition.

Note:

SIGNAL: ■■■■■■ SIGNAL: STR ONG (Signal strength is good)

4.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

XMOOORADIO ID

If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

• the XM Mini-Tuner and Home Dock may not be connected to the XM terminal on the rear panel of this unit properly.

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

M-DAX

ENTER

SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

Y ou can displa y XM inf ormation (such as artist name/ song title, category or signal status) for the channel currently selected in the front panel display.

4

2.

4

1.

1. Press the < / > button until 003 is displayed. Select the information with the SAT DISP

2.

button.

Channel number/name

Artist name/Song title

Channel category

Signal Status

2

1

SIGNAL: ■■■■ SIGNAL: MARGINAL (Signal strength is Marginal)

SIGNAL: ■■

When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:

XMO40:DeepTrc

SIGNAL: WEAK (Signal strength is poor)

40:DeepTracks

XM NO SIGNAL SIGNAL: NON (Loss of the signal)

(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.)

OTHERS

56

ENGLISH

. . .

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

. .

When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:

NAME/TITLE

Pink Floid /

Floid / Money

The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the artist’ s name and song title . (If artist’s name or song title is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.)

When the channel category is displayed:

CAT:Rock

Note:

• To change the display content from XM information to unit functions, do so from the display mode.

(See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 45)

This XM information can also be displayed on a TV monitor connected to the unit.

2 3 4

1. Switch the remote controller to AMP mode. Press the INFO button. The following information

2.

display will be output.

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :XM

SURR-MODE :AUTO

ZONE A:ON SPK:OFF ZONE B:OFF SPK:OFF MAIN VOLUME

-------------------

3. When this display appears, press the INFO

button again. XM information like the following will appear.

XM INFORMATION

XM :046 CHAN :Top Tracks CAT :Rock NAME :1234567890123456 TITLE :1234567890123456

SIGNAL:MARGINAL

SEARCH MODE

You can search for the channel you want to listen to using one of three search modes. You can also enter the number directly to select the desired channel.

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE

1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

TOP

ENTER

(Using the unit)

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front

1.

panel to select the desired station.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons.

2.

2 2

PRESET SEARCH MODE

1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

RECT

X

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

M-DAX

ENTER

(Using the unit)

Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front

1.

panel to select the desired preset station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. 1 or 2 button to tune in the desired preset

2.

station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

2 2

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4. Press the INFO button again. The information display will go out.

Note:

•

If the information contains a character that cannot

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

be recognized by that unit, the character will be displayed with “ ”(space).

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

57

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

. .

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

. .

NAMES AND

CATEGORY SEARCH MODE

FUNCTION

Y ou can select the desired channel from the category allocated to each channel. Category being aired can be only selected.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

POWER ON/OFF

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(Using the unit)

Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

1.

Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to

2.

CONTROLLER

After selecting the Category, Press the 3 or 4

3.

REMOTE

You can return to the normal mode by press the

4.

(Using the remote controller)

TROUBLESHOOTING

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 003 is display.

2.

Press the SA T CAT + / − button.

3.

After selecting the categor y, Press the 3 or 4

4.

OTHERS

You can return to the normal mode by press the

5.

Note:

58

• Category search ends automatically about 5 seconds after the last operation.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

3.

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

3

2 4 5 4

select the desired Category.

cursor button to select the desired station of the category.

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

cursor button to select the desired station of the category.

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

CHANNEL DIRECT CALL

Y ou can select the desired channel by directly tapping the numeric keypads on the remote controller .

2.

3.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the GUIDE button.

2.

“XM - - -” will appear on the display.

Input the three digit number for your desired

3.

Channel with the numeric keypad on the remote controller.

The desired channel will automatically be

4.

tuned.

Note:

If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input

• is cancelled to return to the original display

Notes:

“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the

• channel or information.

•

“UPDA TING” is displayed while updating encryption code.

•

When the selected channel is not available, “XM - -

-” is dispIayed.

•

“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g. midnight).

PRESET MEMORY

You can store the desired channel in the Preset Memory. (You can preset 50 XM Radio stations in addition to FM/AM stations.)

3.

2.

3.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

ZONE

MENU

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

2. 4.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

3 2

4.

(Using the unit)

T une into the desired channel.

1.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

2.

”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the

dispIay.

--XM040

3. Select the preset number by pressing the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking (approx. 5 seconds)

01XM040

4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter.

The display stops blinking. The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

T une into the desired channel.

1.

Press the < / > button until 002 is display.

2.

Press the MEMORY button on the remote

3.

controller. “- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

4.

the numeric buttons.

Note:

When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

• either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

ENGLISH

. .

.

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

D

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

. .

CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL

The preset channel can be checked on the on screen display.

3.

4.

2.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 002 is display.

2.

Press the P-INFO button. to vie w a list of tuner

3.

preset channeI on the on screen display.

If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press

4.

the P-lNFO button. again.

XM PRESET LIST

NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 6 XM001 Preview NO. 7 XM001 Preview NO. 8 XM001 Preview NO. 9 XM001 Preview NO.10 XM001 Preview

Note:

The preset channel indication disappears in about 5

• sec.

3 4

2

PRESET SCAN

3.

5.

2.

5.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed.

2.

press the P-SCAN button on the remote

3.

controller. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the display and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

4.

→ No.2 → etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each. The time changes by the received condition. No stored preset number will be skipped.

Pressing the cursor 2 button during prescanning

5.

speeds up scanning.

Also, pressing the cursor 1 button returns to

the previous preset station.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by press the P-SCAN button.

3 5

2 5

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

You can remove preset stations from the memory using the following procedure.

3.2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

DIRECT

AX

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

3

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH MODE”.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

2.

or remote controller.

The stored preset number blinks in the display

3.

for 5 seconds. WhiIe blinking, Press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote.

“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate

4.

NEURAL SURROUND MODE

When the XM Satellite Radio broadcast received supports XM HD Surround Sound, Surround playback is possible in Neural Surround mode.

3.

2.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button until 001 is displayed.

2.

Press the NEURAL button to tune in the Neural

3.

surround mode.

Note:

For information on Neural Surround, see page 44.

3 2

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

that the specified preset number has been cleared.

Note:

• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

TROUBLESHOOTING

• There are 50 preset channels prepared at the factory default. The 50 channels are all set to “CHANNEL 001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset memory. You can search for only the preset channels.

OTHERS

59

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODEBANDEXITMENUZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

SIRIUS RADIO OVERVIEW

This unit is the SIRIUS Ready receiver. You can receive SIRIUS Satellite Radio by connecting to the SIRIUS CONNECT HOME TUNER, Antenna and AC adapter and subscribing the SIRIUS service.

INTRODUCING SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

CONNECTIONS SETUP

Simply The Best Radio on Radio™ with all your favorite entertainment including

• 100% COMMERCIAL-FREE MUSIC– All kinds of music, no commercials

• LIVE SPORTS COVERA GE & EXPERT T ALK– NFL, NASCAR

®

, NBA, plus college sports coverage of over

150 schools and more

• EXCLUSIVE ENTERTAINMENT & TALK– Howard Stern, Blue Collar Comedy, Maxim Radio, The Foxxhole produced by Jamie Fox, Playboy Radio and more.

• WORLD-CLASS NEWS– Fox, CNN, NPR3 pt, BBC plus local trafﬁ c & weather

• FAMILY & KIDS– Radio Disney, Kids Stuff, Laugh Break Comedy and Disco very Channel Radio plus control what your children hear with parental channel locks

• ESPECIALLY FOR WOMEN– Martha Stewart Living Radio, Cosmo Radio, Deepak Chopra, Candace Bushnell, Barbara W alters and more

• FREE ONLINE LISTENING– Subscr ibers listen online to 100% commercial-free music, Howard Stern, Martha Stewart and more

OPERATION

Questions? Visit sirius.com or siriuscanada.ca

BASIC

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE

Listeners can subscribe by visiting SIRIUS on the web at https://activate.siriusradio .com or by calling toll-free at 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474). Customers should hav e their Radio ID and credit card ready. The Radio ID can be found by selecting channel 0 on the radio.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

(See the “CHECKING THE SIRIUS SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID” p.60)

A WARNING AGAINST REVERSE ENGINEERING:

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, rev erse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS Satellite Radio system.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Sirius is available in the US for subscribers with addresses in the continental US and is available in Canada for subscribers with a Canadian address. Required subscription plus compatible SIRIUS tuner and antenna are required and sold separately . SIRIUS Prog ramming is subject to change. Visit sirius.com for the most complete and up-to-date channel lineup and product information. “SIRIUS” and the SIRIUS dog logo and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.

TROUBLESHOOTING

LISTENING TO SIRIUS SATELLITE RADIO

SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE

Before you can listen to SIRIUS Satellite Radio, you must ﬁ rst select the input source on the unit.

1.

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

2.

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

PURE

DIRECT

PHONES

2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

ZONE

SURROUND

AUTO

MODE

PURE

STANDBY

DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

PHONES

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

(Using the unit)

Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select

1.

“TUNER”.

Press the BAND button to select SIRIUS.

2.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 001 is display ed.

2.

Select SIRIUS button.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

CHECKING THE SIRIUS SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID

2.

1.

1. Press the < / > button until 003 is display ed. Press the SAT DISP button f our times to display

2.

the signal status on the front display of the unit. Signal strength can be displayed for both SATELLITE and TERRESTRIAL broadcasts.

2

1

SAT :

TERR :

• The display changes as shown below according to

the receiving condition.

EXCELENT display

:

GOOD display

:

WEAK display

:

NO SIGNAL display

:

OTHERS

60

ENGLISH

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

T

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HHDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

C

. . .

3. Adjust the antenna location until signal strength is good.

Select channel 0 (SR000) with the 3 or 4

4.

cursor button of the unit or the remote.

4.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

T OR

ZONE

UND

AUTO

E

PURE DIRECT

PHONES

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

M-DAX

ENTER

• The Radio ID is displayed.

SROOOSiriusID

Note:

If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,

• the SIRIUS Connect Home tuner, Antenna or AC adapter may not be connected to the SIRIUS terminal on the rear panel of this unit properly.

4 4

SWITCHING SIRIUS INFORMATION IN THE FRONT PANEL DISPLAY

You can display SIRIUS information (such as artist name, song title, composer name, category or signal status) for the channel currently selected in the front panel display.

2.

1.

2

1

1. Press the < / > button until 003 is display ed. Select the information with the SAT DISP

2.

button.

hannel number/name

Artist name/Song title

Composer name

Category

Signal status (satellite)

Signal status (terrestrial)

When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:

NAME/TITLE

Pink Floid /

Floid / Money

When the Composer name is displayed:

COMPOSER

Roger Water

The “NAME / TITLE” or “COMPOSER” is displayed for 2 seconds, follo wed b y the artist name / Song title or Composer name. (If artist name / song title or composer name is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.)

When the channel category is displayed:

CAT:Rock

Note:

• To change the display content from SIRIUS information to unit functions, do so from the display mode. (See “DISPLA Y MODE” on page 45)

This SIRIUS information can also be displayed on a TV monitor connected to the unit.

2 3 4

1. Switch the remote controller to AMP mode. Press the INFO button. The following

2.

information.

VIDEO :DVD AUDIO :SIRIUS

SURR-MODE :AUTO

ZONE A:ON SPK:OFF ZONE B:OFF SPK:OFF MAIN VOLUME

-------------------

3. When this display appears, press the INFO

button again. SIRIUS information like the following.

SIRIUS INFORMATION

SIRIUS:007 CHAN :70s Hits CAT :Pop NAME :1234567890123456 TITLE :1234567890123456 CMPOSR:1234567890123456 SAT :EXCELLENT TERR :WEAK

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

4. Press the INFO button again. The information

When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:

display will go out.

SR024:

(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is scrolled.)

Note:

•

If the information contains a character that cannot be recognized by that unit, the character will be displayed with “ ”(space).

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

61

ENGLISH

. .

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX M-DA X

MODE

SURROUND

CLEARMEMORYT-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

1

. .

TOP

ZONE SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX M-DA X

CLEARMEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

. .

.

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

SEARCH MODE

You can search for the channel you want to listen to using one of three search modes. You can also enter the number directly to select the desired channel.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE

1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

OPERATION

(Using the unit)

BASIC

1.

(Using the remote controller)

1.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

2.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

TOP

ENTER

Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front

panel to select the desired station.

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

Press and hold the

3 or 4 cursor

button.

PRESET SEARCH MODE

.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

RECT

X

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

M-DAX

ENTER

2

(Using the unit)

2

Press the 1 or 2 cursor button on the front

1.

panel to select the desired preset station.

(Using the remote controller)

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. 1 or 2 cursor button to tune in the desired

2.

preset station.

Or enter the preset station number with the

numeric buttons.

CATEGORY SEARCH MODE

Y ou can select the desired channel from the category allocated to each channel.

CHANNEL DIRECT CALL

Y ou can select the desired channel by directly tapping the numeric keypads on the remote controller .

Category being aired can be only selected.

2.

2 2

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

3.

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

T-M

BAND

EXIT

TOP

ENTER

2.

3

2

3.

4 5 4

(Using the unit)

Press the ENTER button on the front panel.

1.

Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to

2.

select the desired Category.

After selecting the Category, Press the 3 or 4

3.

cursor button to select the desired station of the category.

You can return to the normal mode by press the

4.

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 003 is display.

2.

Press the SA T CAT + / − button.

3.

After selecting the categor y, Press the 3 or 4

4.

cursor button to select the desired station of the category.

You can return to the normal mode by press the

5.

ENTER button during Category Search Mode.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the GUIDE button.

2.

“SR - - -” will appear on the display.

Input the three digit number for your desired

3.

Channel with the numeric keypad on the remote controller.

The desired channel will automatically be

4.

tuned.

Note:

If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input

• is cancelled to return to the original display

Notes:

“UPDATING” is displayed while updating channel

• map.

•

When the selected channel is not available, “INVALID” is dispIayed.

OTHERS

62

Note:

• Category search ends automatically about 5 seconds after the last operation.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

. .

.

. .

PRESET MEMORY

You can store the desired channel in the Preset Memory. (You can preset 50 SIRIUS Radio stations in addition to FM/AM stations.)

3.

2.

3.

ZONE

THX

SETUP MIC

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH INPUT

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

MENU

2. 4.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ENTER

3 2

4.

(Using the unit)

T une into the desired channel.

1.

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.

2.

”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the

dispIay.

4. Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The display stops blinking. The station is now stored in the speciﬁ ed preset

memory location.

(Using the remote controller)

T une into the desired channel.

1.

Press the < / > button until 002 is display ed.

2.

Press the MEMORY button on the remote

3.

controller. “- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the display.

Enter the desired preset number by pressing

4.

the numeric buttons.

Note:

When entering a single digit number (2 for example),

• either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few seconds.

CHECKING THE SIRIUS PRESET CHANNEL

The preset channel can be checked on the on screen display.

3.

4.

2.

(Using the remote controller)

Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode.

1.

Press the < / > button until 002 is display.

2.

Press the P-INFO button. to view a list of tuner

3.

preset channeI on the on screen display.

If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press

4.

the P-lNFO button. again.

SIRIUS PRESET LIST

NO. 1 SR010 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 2 SR011 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 3 SR015 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 4 SR022 XXXXXXXXXX NO. 5 SR125 XXXXXXXXXX

Note:

The preset channel indication disappears in about 5

• sec.

3 4

2

PRESET SCAN

3.

5.

2.

5.

1. Switch the remote controller to TUNER mode. Press the < / > button until 002 is displayed.

2.

press the P-SCAN button on the remote

3.

controller. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the display and then the preset station with the lowest preset number is recalled ﬁ rst.

Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1

4.

→ No.2 → etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each. The time changes by the received condition. No stored preset number will be skipped.

Pressing the 2 cursor button during prescanning

5.

speeds up scanning.

Also, pressing the 1 cursor button returns to

the previous preset station.

When the desired preset station is received,

cancel the preset scan operation by press the P-SCAN button.

3 5

2 5

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

--SR040

TROUBLESHOOTING

3. Select the preset number by pressing the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking (approx. 5 seconds)

01SR040

OTHERS

63

NAMES AND

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

THX

M-DAX

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

SETUP MIC

HDMI

D

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

. .

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

7

.

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

.

CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS

FUNCTION

You can remove preset stations from the memory using the following procedure.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

1. Recall the preset number to be cleared with

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Press the MEMORY button on the front panel

2.

The stored preset number blinks in the display

3.

TROUBLESHOOTING

“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate

4.

Note:

• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the

OTHERS

64

ENGLISH

3.2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

DIRECT

AX

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

SPEAKER

7.1CH

THX

INPUT

SETUP MIC

ENTER

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

3

the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH MODE”.

or the remote.

for 5 seconds. WhiIe blinking, Press the CLEAR button on the front panel or the remote.

that the specified preset number has been cleared.

CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.

PARENTAL LOCK

This function is used to lock channels you do not want to receive.

SETTING/RELEASING PARENTAL LOCK

3. 5. 2. 5.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

3 5

3. 5

1. Tune to the channel that you want to set parental lock.

Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or

2.

the P-LOCK button on the remote controller.

PASSWORD

3. When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the cursor buttons on the main unit or remote controller, or the numeric buttons on the remote controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then press the ENTER button on the main unit or the remote controller.

Note:

The password is set to 9999 when shipped from the factory.

PASWORD OK!

7

SR001 abcdefg

4. When the correct password is entered, [PASSWORD OK!] is displayed and the display ﬂ ashes “✔” or “:”.

Set parental lock on/off using the 3 / 4 cursor

5.

buttons on the main unit or remote controller, then confirm the setting using the ENTER button on the main unit or remote controller.

“✔” Lock status “:” Unlock status You can unlock all locked channels at this time

by pressing the CLEAR button on the main unit or on the remote controller for 5 seconds. When “ALL UNLOCK?” is displayed, press the ENTER button on the main unit or remote controller. “UNLOCKING..” is displayed and all locked channels are unlocked.

Notes:

• If you mistakenly enter the wrong password, you will be asked to reenter the password.

• You can exit parental lock mode using the EXIT button on the main unit or CLEAR button on the remote controller.

• No sound will be output when you tune to a locked channel.

• Although parental lock can be set for more than one channel, all channels will share the same password.

• You cannot set Parental Lock for Channel 0.



7

TEMPORARILY LISTENING TO A LOCKED CHANNEL

3. 2.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

2.

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

2

3

3.

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

7

1. Tune to the locked channel you want to listen to.

Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or

2.

the P-LOCK button on the remote controller.

When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the

3.

cursor buttons on the main unit or remote controller, or the numeric buttons on the remote controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then press the ENTER button on the main unit or remote controller.

When the correct password is entered,

4.

[PASSWORD OK!] is displayed and you can temporarily listen to the channel.

Note:

• You can cancel temporary viewing and listening

by pressing the EXIT button on the main unit or CLEAR button on the remote controller.

• Since the purpose is to listen temporarily to a locked channel, lock status is restored if the channel is changed, the function is changed, the power is turned on/off, or any other such operation is performed. If you want to release lock status, see “Setting/Releasing Parental Lock.”



CHANGING THE PASSWORD

3. 4. 2.6.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

MENU

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

ENTER

2.

3.

4.

1. Set to receive SIRIUS. Press the T-MODE button on the main unit or

2.

the P-LOCK button on the remote controller.

When [PASSWORD ****] appears, use the

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

3.

cursor buttons on the main unit or remote controller, or the numeric button on the remote controller, to enter a password (4 digits), then, with the cursor located at the far right, press the 2 cursor button on the main unit or remote

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

controller.

7

PASWORD 9999

7

CONNECTIONSSETUP

NEW WORD____

4. When [NEW WORD _ _ _ _] is displayed, enter

a new Pass word, then press the ENTER button on the main unit or remote controller.

2.

WORD CHANGED

5. When [WORD CHANGED] is displayed, the

3. 4.

6.

password has been changed.

Press the EXIT button on the main unit or

6.

CLEAR button on the remote controller.

Note:

If the unit is reset the password will be reset to 9999. (See page 99)

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

65

ENGLISH

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

TOP

ZONE

SPEAKER

DISPLAY

INPUT

7.1CH

DIRECT

PURE

PHONES

THX

M-DAX

MODE

SURROUND

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ZONE

DOWN

VOLUME

UP

INPUT

SELECTOR

AUTO

SETUP MIC

HDMI

M-DAX

PURE DIRECT

POWER ON/OFF

STANDBY

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

ENTER

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

ZONE SYSTEM

The Zone System mode allows the same source or different sources to be heard in two ZONEs other than where this unit is installed.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

To use the zone system, connect the audio from the ZONE OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to the ZONE A and B amps.

Connect the VIDEO output (ZONE OUT) terminal to the monitor in Zone A. (ZONE OUT terminal is linked to the source selector in Zone A.)

If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C (see page 19) are not used in the ZONE where this unit is installed, the zone speaker system can be used with the amp for the surround back channel.

Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

OPERATION

2 terminal can be used for the monitor output of

BASIC

ZONE A. This unit supports zone system functions such as

source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep timers and remote control.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE ZONE OUT TERMINALS

3. 4.1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

1. Pressing the ZONE button on the unit one time accesses the ZONE A settings. Pressing it tw o times accesses the ZONE B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the zone feature off.

When the ZONE setting mode is engaged, one

2.

of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

* Displa y when ZONE A is selected

ZA DVD -18dB

* Displa y when ZONE B is selected

ZB DVD -18dB

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

ZONE PLAYBACK USING THE SURROUND BACK PREOUT TERMINALS

This unit allows you to connect another set of power amp and place them in a different ZONE or separated area for Iistening to music.

3. 4.1.

AV PRE TUNER AV8003

PURE DIRECT

M-DAX

INPUT

SELECTOR

SURROUND

MODE

STANDBY

POWER ON/OFF

ZONE

AUTO

SPEAKER

7.1CH

PURE

THX

INPUT

DIRECT

PHONES

SETUP MIC

BAND

EXIT

MENU

ENTER

1. Pressing the ZONE SPEAKER button on the unit one time accesses the ZONE SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times accesses the ZONE SPEAKER B settings. Then, pressing it a third time turns the ZONE SPEAKER feature off.

When the ZONE SPEAKER setting mode is

2.

engaged, one of the following screens appears on the display for 10 seconds.

* Displa y when ZONE SPEAKER A is selected

ZSA DVD -18dB

UP

HDMI

DOWN

VOLUME

CLEAR

MEMORY

T-MODE

TOP

DISPLAY

M-DAX

Notes for Zone Speaker

• The Zone Speaker mode can be set for only one of the ZONEs, A or B.

• The ZONE SPEAKER output can be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE, ZSP A or ZSP B” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 30)

• “The Surr . Back Speakers ar e in use” is displayed when the ZONE SPEAKER button is pressed when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to “NONE, ZSP A or ZSP B” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER SETUP, page 30)

• The Zonespeaker mode cannot be used at the same time as the speaker C. When connecting for zone use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the rear panel to OFF.

• When the unit is put in ZONE SPEAKER mode and ZSP A or ZSP B has been set as the Surround Back Speaker (P.30), the ZONE SPEAKER function can be turned on automatically simply by pressing the SOURCE button.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

66

* Displa y when ZONE SPEAKER B is selected

3. Select an input source with the INPUT SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

4.

the ZONE used in the zone system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU.

(See page 36)

ZSB DVD -18dB

3. Select an input source with the INPUT SELECTOR knob.

Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of

4.

the ZONE used in the zone system as you like.

Note:

• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page

36.)

ENGLISH

.

CONTROLLING THE ZONE FUNCTION FROM ANOTHER ZONE

The ZONE function can be controlled from another ZONE, even from a ZONE not set for this unit, by connecting a MARANTZ product with external IR receiver or infrared receiver using the RC2001 or Zone remote controller RC101. (See page 18)

SET THE REMOTE CONTROLLER TO A MODE THAT CONTROLS ZONE A OR B.

Operations such as switching the input source between ZONE A and B and turning the ZONE function on/off can be performed by setting the ZONE for using the remote controller.

3. 3. 1

2.

1. Press the HOME button. Press the </> button umtil 003 is displayed.

2.

Press the ZONE-A or ZONE-B button.

3.

<RC101>

ZONE A mode (default setting) ZONE B mode ZONE C mode (this zone not used by this unit) ZONE D mode: MAIN ZONE (the ZONE in which this unit is installed)

2

2.

1.

1. (In the example given here, the user changes the mode used to control ZONE A.)

Hold down the SET button and ZONE button

simultaneously until the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice. The backlight lights.

Press the ZONE A button. The Send indicator

2.

ﬂ ashes twice when the setting is complete.

The following buttons are now used for ZONE

A only. Volume adjustment, sleep timer, mute, and input functions can be selected from the ZONE.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/– MUTE

INFO SLEEP

Once the operation in 2. is performed, pressing the ZONE B button switches the mode being controlled to ZONE B. Pressing the ZONE D button switches the mode being controlled to MAIN ZONE.

Notes:

• If TUNER is selected as the input function for ZONE while a tuner (FM or AM and XM or SIRIUS) is being used by MAIN ZONE, that tuner cannot be operated from ZONE. Only the same broadcast station as that being tuned by the MAIN ZONE can be listened to.

• ZONE output is analog only. Digital signal input is not supported.

CONTROLLING ZONE SPEAKERS

Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A or ZONE-B mode. ZONE Speakers can be controlled on the ﬁ rst page of the remote controller.

<RC101>

An RC101 remote controller set to ZONE A or ZONE B can be switched to control the ZONE Speaker function.

1.

2.

1. (In the example given here, the setting for ZONE is switched to the setting for ZONE Speakers.)

Hold down the SET button and POWER ON

button simultaneously until the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice.

The backlight continues to ﬂ ash.

Press numeric key 2.

2.

ZONE mode: 1 (default setting) ZONE Speaker mode: 2

Notes:

• To restore the settings for ZONE, press numeric key 1 in step 2.

• Only the MAIN ZONE can be controlled when ZONE D mode is set.

3.

1.

Press the ENTER button. Once settings are

3.

complete, the Send indicator ﬂ ashes twice.

The following buttons are used for set ZONE

mode or ZONE Speaker mode only.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/– MUTE

INFO SLEEP

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

67

ENGLISH

.

NAMES AND

OSD INFORMATION DISPLAY ON THE ZONE

FUNCTION

MONITOR

The setting status of ZONE A can be displayed on a TV monitor connected to the video output for ZONE (ZONE OUT) terminals.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

2

1. Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A mode. Press the INFO button.

2.

<RC101>

OPERATION

BASIC

1. Press the INFO button.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OSD information is displayed on the ZONE

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

1.

monitor.

ZONE A VIDEO :DSS AUDIO :DSS SLEEP :90 min MONO/ST:STEREO OSD INFO:ENABLE ZONE :ON SPKR :OFF VOL :VARI VOL :VARI LEVEL:-20dB LEVEL:-90dB

--- MAIN ZONE STATUS --VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD

TROUBLESHOOTING

Notes:

The OSD cannot be displayed on the ZONE monitor when the OSD is being displayed for ZONE.

OTHERS

68

REMO TE CONTROLLER OPERATION

ENGLISH

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC2001 TO THE UNIT

To control the unit by your RC2001, you hav e to select the device AMP, NETWORK or TUNER by pressing the function selector in HOME mode. Please refer below for the details in AMP, NETWORK and TUNER mode .

Note:

Except for some buttons, soft buttons result in the same operation as pressing either the Left or Right buttons for each command. (Excluding the * symbol)

HOME MODE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the AV8003 on and off POWER ON Turn the AV8003 on POWER OFF Turn the AV8003 off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

ENTER

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level 1 SELECT DVD function 2 SELECT DSS function 3 SELECT NETWORK function 4 SELECT TUNER function 5 SELECT CD function 6 SELECT AUX function 7 SELECT VCR1 function 8 SELECT TV function 9 SELECT TAPE function

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

HOME MACRO Switch the remote controller to MACRO mode. AMP Switch the remote controller to AMP mode.

1

1.DVD Switch the remote controller to 1. DVD mode.

2.DSS Switch the remote controller to 2. DSS mode.

3.NETWORK Switch the remote controller to 3. NETWORK mode. HOME

4.TUNER Switch the remote controller to 4. TUNER mode.

5.CD Switch the remote controller to 5. CD mode.

2

6.AUX Switch the remote controller to 6. AUX mode.

7.VCR1 Switch the remote controller to 7. VCR1 mode.

8.TV Switch the remote controller to 8. TV mode. HOME

9.TAPE Switch the remote controller to 9. TAPE mode. VCR2 Switch the remote controller to VCR2 mode.

3

PLASMA Switch the remote controller to PLASMA mode. ZONE-A Switch the remote controller to ZONE-A mode. ZONE-B Switch the remote controller to ZONE-B mode. HOME IPOD Switch the remote controller to IPOD mode. V-SWITCH Switch the remote controller to V-SWITCH mode.

4

CD-R Switch the remote controller to CD-R mode. MD Switch the remote controller to MD mode. BLU-RAY Switch the remote controller to BLU-RAY mode.

Enter the SETUP MENU Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

MACRO MODE

A macro is a function for performing multiple button operations at one time . Ex.) WATCH DVD Turn on the AV8003. = Turn on the TV. = Turn on the DVD. = Set the TV function to DVD. = Set the AMP function to DVD. = Set the remote controller to DVD mode.

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

MACRO ALL-ON Turn on all components. ALL-OFF Turn off all components.

1

WATCH DVD View DVD WATCH DSS View DSS WATCH NET View NETWORK MACRO LISTEN AM Listen to AM LISTEN FM Listen to FM

2

LISTEN XM Listen to XM LISTEN SR Listen to SIRIUS LISTEN CD Listen to CD MACRO LSTN IPOD Listen to iPod WATCH VCR View VCR

3

WATCH TV View TV

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

69

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

AMP MODE

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the AV8003 on and off POWER ON Turn the AV8003 on POWER OFF Turn the AV8003 off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode

ENTER

MENU Enter the SETUP MENU EXIT Exits from SETUP MENU MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level 1 Select DVD function 2 Select DSS function 3 Select NETWORK function 4 Select TUNER function 5 Select CD function 6 Select AUX function 7 Select VCR1 function 8 Select TV function 9 Select TAPE function

Enter the SETUP MENU Conﬁ rms the setting in SETUP MENU mode

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

AMP M-DAX M-DAX ON/OFF SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function

1

DISPLAY

SURR MODE Selects the surround mode

- INPUT + Switches the amp function* AMP

7.1CH IN

A/D SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL AUDIO SELECT AUDIO mode

2

1-HDMI-2

LIP SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode AMP

- BASS +

3

-TREBLE+

RE-EQ RE-EQ ON/OFF NIGHT NIGHT mode ON/OFF EQ SELECT EQ mode AMP TEST TONE Select TEST TONE menu

CH SELECT

4

-CH LEV+

ATT Reduces the input level VIDEO OFF VIDEO OFF AMP

AUTO SURR

STEREO Select STEREO mode

5

P DIRECT Select PURE DIRECT mode THX Select THX mode

M-CH ST

AMP

DTS Select DTS mode

6

ES/EX Select EX/ES mode CS2 Select CS2 mode VIRTUAL Select VIRTUAL mode

Changes the front display mode

Turns 7.1CH INPUT mode ON/ OFF.

(Left) SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 1*

(Right) SELECT HDMI OUTPUT 2*

(Left) BASS -* (Right) BASS +* (Left) TREBLE -* (Right) TREBLE +*

Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch input setup

(Left) CH LEVEL-* (Right) CH LEVEL+*

Select AUTO SURROUND mode

Select MULTI CHANNEL STEREO mode

Select DOLBY mode

Page Command Note

AMP DVD Select DVD function TV Select TV function

7

VCR1 Select VCR1 function DSS Select DSS function AUX Select AUX function AMP TAPE Select TAPE function CD Select CD function

8

TUNER Select TUNER function NETWORK Select NETWORK function

9

AMP

P. AMP ON

P. AMP OFF

Use when you want to turn on the MM8003 by itself.

Use when you want to turn off the MM8003 by itself.

70

NETWORK MODE TUNER MODE

Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to top of NETWORK page INFO Used for displaying ﬁ le details, etc. Cursor Used for moving the cursor, etc. ENTER Used for item selection, etc. MENU Enter the Tool menu EXIT Used to return to the previous page, etc. CH +/- Switch the page

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Used during NETWORK settings Blue Move to top of MUSIC page Red Move to top of PHOTO page Green Move to top of VIDEO page Yellow Move to top of SERVER page

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function

5 / 6

RANDOM RANDOM play

1

REPEAT REPEAT play TOP Move to top of NETWORK page

- PAGE +

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function MUSIC ALL Move to All Songs M ARTIST Move to MUSIC ARTIST

2

M ALBUM Move to MUSIC ALBUM M GENRE Move to MUSIC GENRE M P-LIST Move to MUSIC PLAYLIST

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function PHOTO ALL Move to ALL PHOTO P ALBUM Move to PHOTO ALBUM

3

P P-LIST Move to PHOTO PLAYLIST

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function VIDEO ALL Move to ALL Video V ALBUM Move to VIDEO ALBUM

4

V GENRE Move to VIDEO GENRE V P-LIST Move to VIDEO PLAYLIST

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

(left) Move to previous page* (right) Move to next page*

Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Enter F-DIRECT mode. Cursor UP Frequency scan up Cursor DOWN Frequency scan down Cursor LEFT Selects a preset station down Cursor RIGHT Selects a preset station up CH + / - Selects a preset station up and down 0–9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

4.TUNER Select TUNER function FM Select FM AM Select AM

1

XM Select XM SIRIUS Select SIRIUS NEURAL Select NEURAL AUDIO

4.TUNER Select TUNER function

- TUNE +

2

T-MODE Select MONO/STEREO P-SCAN Select PRESET SCAN P-INFO SHOW PRESET INFORMATION MEMORY Enter the tuner preset memory numbers

4.TUNER Select TUNER function

-SAT TUN+

SAT DISP Switch display information

3

-SAT CAT+

XM SR

P-LOCK Select PAEENTAL LOCK

4.TUNER Select TUNER function DISPLAY Switch display information PTY RDS PTY AUTO SEARCH mode

4

AF RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY STM RDS STATION mode DWR RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE

(Left) Frequency scan down* (Right) Freqency scan up*

(Left) Category search down* (Right) Category search up* (Left) Select XM* (Right) Select SIRIUS*

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

3.NETWORK Select NETWORK function PLAYLIST Add to playlist BILINGUAL Switch audio during movie playback

5

SETTINGS Move to SETTINGS MENU

RESTART Restart NETWORK

OTHERS

71

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

Note:

• Not all commands are necessarily supported by each source component.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off POWER ON Turns the DVD player on POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft button in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

EXIT Retuen to MENU

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9, +10 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

1.DVD Select DVD function

5 / 6

0

1

ANGLE Select ANGLE SUBTITLE Select SUB TITLE AUDIO Select LANGUAGES

1.DVD Select DVD function ZOOM ZOOM mode ON/OFF SETUP Select SETUP MENU

2

VIDEO ADJ Fine Video adjustment V ON/OFF VIDEO ON/OFF DIMMER FL Display Dimmer

1.DVD Select DVD function PROGRAM PROGRAM mode REPEAT REPEAT mode

3

A-B REPEAT A to B RANDOM RANDOM play COND MEMO Memorize the disc settings

1.DVD Select DVD function SOUNDMODE Switch to PLAY mode SEARCH Switch to SEARCH mode

4

SCAN Enter the scan mode PAGE Switch page for DVD-Audio HDMI Change HDMI resolution

1.DVD Select DVD function DISC SKIP Moves to the next available disc tray.

1-DISC-2

5

3-DISC-4

5-DISC- (Left) DVD Changer DISC5*

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* Tray OPEN/CLOSE

(Left) DVD Changer DISC1* (Right) DVD Changer DISC2* (Left) DVD Changer DISC3* (Right) DVD Changer DISC4*

OTHERS

72

CONTROLLING A DSS (DSS MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE)

ENGLISH

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DSS on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU. INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of DVD disc EXIT RETURN TO MENU INPUT Switch DSS input PREV Goes to previous selected channel CH + / - Switch DSS channel

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

2.DSS Select DSS function MEMO Enter a recording program DISPLAY On screen channel marker

1

TV/VCR Select TV/ VCR AUDIO Select Audio mode EJECT Eject

2.DSS Select DSS function FAV Fatvorite user channel list ALT Alternate audio channel language

2

FTCH Brings up on screen channel logo ANT Select broadcast or antenna

Play Skip forward or previous track Rec Stop Pause

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off POWER ON Turns the CD player on POWER OFF Turns the CD player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9, +10 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

5.CD Select CD function

5 / 6

0

1

SOUNDMODE Change sound mode QUICK RP Jump back the current playing DISPLAY Turn off the display

5.CD Select CD function PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM play

2

REPEAT REPEAT play A-B REPEAT A to B INTRO SCN AUTO MUSIC SCAN

5.CD Select CD function EDIT Edit the program TEXT Select TEXT display mode

3

TIME Select TIME display mode SCROLL Scroll the text display DIG OUT Turn the digital output on and off.

5.CD Select CD function NEXT DISC CD changer next disc PREV DISC CD changer previous disc

4

1-DISC-2

3-DISC-4

5-DISC- (Left) CD Changer DISC5*

5.CD Select CD function

- PITCH +

5

PITCH RST Reset the play speed

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* Tray OPEN/CLOSE

(Left) CD Changer DISC1* (Right) CD Changer DISC2* (Left) CD Changer DISC3* (Right) CD Changer DISC4*

(Left) Adjust the play speed down* (Right) Adjust the play speed up*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

73

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX MODE / IPOD MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR1 MODE)

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) ON and OFF POWER ON Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) ON POWER OFF Turns the UNIVERSAL DOCK (Dock connector) OFF Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER Enters the setting MENU Call up the menu

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

6.AUX Select AUX function

5 / 6

1

MODE CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE REPEAT Select REPEAT PLAY SHUFFLE Select SHUFFLE PLAY

6.AUX Select AUX function ARTIST SORT ORDER (ARTIST) ALBUM SORT ORDER (ALBUM)

2

SONGS SORT ORDER (SONG) GENRE SORT ORDER (GENRE) COMPOSER SORT ORDER (COMPOSER)

6.AUX Select AUX function PLAYLSIT SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST) PODCAST SORT ORDER (PODCAST)

3

AUDIOBOOK SORT ORDER (AUDIOBOOK)

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER Enters the setting MENU Calls the menu EXIT Exits the programming menu CH + / - Select VCR channel

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9, +10 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function

5 / 6

1

EJECT Eject MEMO Enter a recording program TV/VCR Select TV/VCR 2 x PLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK SPEED

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED STILL STILL FRAME

2

OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING AUDIO Select AUDIO MODE SKIP SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER

7.VCR1 Select VCR1 function VIS+ VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT VIS- VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

3

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

74

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV MODE)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off POWER ON Turns the TV on POWER OFF Turns the TV off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Display Programmable TV menu INFO OSD On/Off Cursor Move cursor on menus, etc. ENTER Conﬁ rm selection on menus, etc. MENU Display menu EXIT Exit menu MUTE Temporarily stop audio output and cancels INPUT Switch input PREV LAST CHANNEL function VOL +/- Adjust the TV sound level CH +/- Select channel 0-9, +10 Select TV channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Cancel various input

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

8.TV SELECT TV function MEMO Starts program ALT-CH LAST CHANNEL function

1

CH CALL SLEEP Sleep Timer VIDEO Switch TV to VIDEO function

8.TV SELECT TV function S-VIDEO Switch TV to S-VIDEO function

1 COMP 2

2

RGB Switch TV to RGB function HDMI/DVI Switch TV to HDMI/DVI function HDMI2 Switch TV to HDMI2 function

8.TV SELECT TV function ASPECT Select aspect ratio ZOOM Aspect Zoom

3

NORMAL Aspect Normal THROUGH Aspect Through FULL Aspect Full

8.TV SELECT TV function STANDARD Select Standard mode THEATER Select Theater mode

4

DYNAMIC Select Dynamic mode CINEMA Select Cinema mode PATTERN Focus Pattern on/off

8.TV SELECT TV function LIGHT Rear panel light on/off VMUTE ON VIDEO MUTE ON

5

VMUTE OFF VIDEO MUTE OFF

ChannelcallOn/off

(Left) Switch TV to COMPONENT1 function* (Right) Switch TV to COMPONENT2 function*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

75

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR2 MODE)

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

9.TAPE Select TAPE function

5 / 6

1

TAPE-A Select TAPE DECK A TAPE-B Select TAPE DECK B REC MUTE Insert blank during recording DIRECTION AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION

9.TAPE Select TAPE function COUNT RST COUNT RESET AMS AUTO MUSIC SCAN

2

BLANKSKIP Searches for an empty part TIME TIME DISPLAY mode TRAY TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls the menu EXIT Exits the programming menu CH + / - Select VCR channel

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9, +10 Select VCR channel / Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function

5 / 6

1

EJECT EJECT MEMO Enter a recording program TV/VCR Select TV/VCR 2 x PLAY TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK SPEED VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function SLOW SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED STILL STILL FRAME

2

OTR ONE TOUCH RECORDING AUDIO Select AUDIO MODE SKIP SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER VCR2 Select DSS/VCR2 function VIS+ VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT VIS- VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS

3

Play Skip forward or previous track Record Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

76

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ PLASMA (PLASMA MODE)

POWER ON Turns the PLASMA on POWER OFF Turns the PLASMA off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD On/Off Cursor Move cursor on menus, etc. ENTER Conﬁ rm selection on menus, etc. MENU Display menu EXIT Exit menu MUTE Temporarily stop audio output and cancel INPUT Switch input VOL +/- Adjust the PLASMA sound level

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

PLASMA Select TV function VIDEO VIDEO input select HD/DVD HD/DVD input select

1

PC/RGB RGB input select ASPECT ASPECT select PIC MEMO Picture memory select PLASMA Select TV function COLOR TEMP Color temp PIC MODE Picture mode

2

AUTO ADJ Auto adjust on CONTRAST Call contrast adjustment BRIGHT Call brightness adjustment PLASMA Select TV function

- CONT + Contrast adjustment*

-BRIGHT+ Brightness adjustment*

3

-SHARP+ Sharpness adjustment*

-COLOR+ Color adjustment*

- TINT + Tint adjustment* PLASMA Select TV function POP ON SIDE BY SIDE on PIP ON PICTURE IN PICTURE on

4

SINGLE PIP/POP off

PLASMA Select TV function ID SELECT ID select M SCREEN Multi screen display

5

ID CLEAR ID clear ACTIV SEL Active screen select

1-VIDEO-2

PLASMA Select TV function 3-VIDEO- (Left) Select VIDEO3*

1DVD/HD2

6

3DVD/HD4

1PC/RGB2

3PC/RGB (Left) Select RGB3* PLASMA Select TV function NORMAL Select aspect NORMAL FULL Select aspect FULL

7

STADIUM Select aspect STADIUM ZOOM Select aspect ZOOM 14:9 Select aspect 14:9 PLASMA Select TV function

2.35:1 Select aspect 2.35:1 NORMAL Select picture mode NORMAL

8

1THEATER2

DEFAULT Select picture mode DEFAULT BRIGHT Select picture mode BRIGHT

(Left) Select VIDEO1* (Right) Select VIDEO2*

(Left) Select HD/DVD1* (Right) Select HD/DVD2* (Left) Select HD/DVD3* (Right) Select HD/DVD4* (Left) Select RGB1* (Right) Select RGB2*

(Left) Select picture mode THEATER1* (Right) Select picture mode THEATER2*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

77

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD-R (CD-R MODE) CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE)

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD recorder on and off POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

CD-R Select CD function

5 / 6

0

1

INPUT Select INPUT SOURCE TR INCR Select INPUT SOURCE SYNC REC ACTIVATE SYNCRO RECORDING CD-R Select CD function PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM PLAY

2

REPEAT REPEAT PLAY A-B REPEAT A TO B INTRO SCN AUTO MUSIC SCAN CD-R Select CD function DISPLAY Turn off the display BLANK RECORDS BLANK

3

SCROLL Scroll the text display

Play Skip forward or previous track RECORDING Stop Pause

(Left) REWIND (Right) FAST FORWARD TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the MD deck on and off POWER ON Turns the MD deck on POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page ENTER enters the setting MENU Switches the display information

2

4 / ¢

0 9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

MD

5 / 6

0

1

INPUT Select INPUT SOURCE MARKER Select AUTO MARKER SYNC REC SYNCRO REC MD PROGRAM PROGRAM RANDOM RANDOM PLAY

2

REPEAT REPEAT PLAY EDIT Select EDIT mode SP/LP Select SP/LP mode MD TIME Select TIME mode CHAR Select CHARACTER mode

3

Play Skip forward or previous track RECORDING Stop Pause

(left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD* TRAY OPEN/CLOSE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

78

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ BLU-RAY PLAYER (BLU-RAY MODE)

POWER ON Turns the Blu-ray player on POWER OFF Turns the Blu-ray player off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page GUIDE Move to TOP MENU INFO OSD ON/OFF Cursor Move the cursor ENTER enters the setting MENU Calls up the menu of disc EXIT RETURN TO MENU

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

0-9 Input the numeric CLEAR Clears the inputting BLUE, RED,

GREEN, YELLOW

Note:

If the BLUE, RED, GREEN, and YELLOW buttons on the BD8003 do not function correctly, perform Learning.

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

BLU-RAY

5 / 6

0

1

ANGLE Select ANGLE SUBTITLE Select SUB TITLE AUDIO Select LANGUAGES BLU-RAY ZOOM enlarge the picture on the screen SET UP Select SETUP MENU

2

MODE Change various menus P-DIRECT Select pure direct mode. DIMMER adjust the brightness of the front panel display BLU-RAY SEARCH Switch the SEARCH mode REPEAT REPEAT mode

3

A-B REPEAT A to B RANDOM RANDOM play

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

Select item on some BD menus

(left) REWIND (Right) FAST FORWARD Tray OPEN/CLOSE

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

79

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONTROLLING ZONES USING THE RC2001

The supplied RC2001 remote controller can be used for Zones. To use the remote controller for Zones, be sure to switch it to ZONE-A or ZONE-B mode .

ZONE A (ZONE-A MODE)

CONNECTIONS SETUP

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the ZONE A on and off POWER ON Turn the ZONE A on POWER OFF Turn the ZONE A off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Used to move the cursor, etc. ENTER Used to select items, etc. EXIT Used to return to the previous screen, etc. MUTE Decrease the sound temporarily for ZONE A VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level for ZONE A

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

Note:

Soft buttons on Page 5 and the 2, 4, ¢, 9, and ; buttons are only used for the NETWORK function.

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

ZONE-A Z.SPK-ON Turn on ZONE SPEAKER A Z.SPK-OFF Turn off ZONE SPEAKER A

1

ON/OFF Turn on/off ZONE SPEAKER A

- SPK VOL +

SPK MUTE Mute ZONE SPEAKER A ZONE-A DVD Set ZONE A function to DVD TV Set ZONE A function to TV

2

VCR1 Set ZONE A function to VCR1 DSS Set ZONE A function to DSS AUX Set ZONE A function to AUX ZONE-A TAPE Set ZONE A function to TAPE

3

CD Set ZONE A function to CD TUNER Set ZONE A function to TUNER NETWORK Set ZONE A function to NETWORK ZONE-A

AM FM

XM SR

4

P-SCAN Perform PRESET SCAN for the ZONE A tuner

-PRESET+

- TUNE +

ZONE-A

ALL-M RND

ALL-P RPT

5

ALL-V RES

- PAGE +

5 / 6

(Left) Decrease volume for ZONE SPEAKER A* (Right) Increase volume for ZONE SPEAKER A*

(Left) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to AM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to FM* (Left) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to XM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE A tuner to SIRIUS*

(Left) Perform PRESET - for the ZONE A tuner* (Right) Perform PRESET + for the ZONE A tuner* (Left) Decrease the freqency for the ZONE A tuner* (Right) Increase the freqency for the ZONE A tuner*

(Left) Move to All Songs* (Right) RANDOM play* (Left) Move to All Photo* (Right) REPEAT play* (Left)Move to ALL Video* (Right) Select the resolution* (Left) Move to previous page* (Right) Move to next page* (Left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

OTHERS

80

ZONE B (ZONE-B MODE)

ENGLISH

SOURCE ON/OFF Turn the ZONE B on and off POWER ON Turn the ZONE B on POWER OFF Turn the ZONE B off Soft button Refer to the list of soft buttons in the table below. HOME Switch the remote controller to HOME mode. < / > Scroll the page INFO OSD information on/off Cursor Used to move the cursor, etc. ENTER Used to select items, etc. EXIT Used to return to the previous screen, etc. MUTE Decrease the sound temporarily for ZONE B VOL + / - Adjust the over all sound level for ZONE B

2

4 / ¢

9 ;

Note:

Soft buttons on Page 5 and the 2, 4, ¢, 9, and ; buttons are only used for the NETWORK function.

Play Skip forward or previous track Stop Pause

List of Soft buttons

Page Command Note

ZONE-B Z.SPK-ON Turn on ZONE SPEAKER B Z.SPK-OFF Turn off ZONE SPEAKER B

1

ON/OFF Turn on/off ZONE SPEAKER B

- SPK VOL +

SPK MUTE Mute ZONE SPEAKER B ZONE-B DVD Set ZONE B function to DVD TV Set ZONE B function to TV

2

VCR1 Set ZONE B function to VCR1 DSS Set ZONE B function to DSS AUX Set ZONE B function to AUX ZONE-B TAPE Set ZONE B function to TAPE

3

CD Set ZONE B function to CD TUNER Set ZONE B function to TUNER NETWORK Set ZONE B function to NETWORK ZONE-B

AM FM

XM SR

4

P-SCAN Perform PRESET SCAN for the ZONE B tuner

- PRESET +

- TUNE +

ZONE-B RANDOM RANDOM play REPEAT REPEAT play

5

ALL MUSIC Move to All Songs

5 / 6

(Left) Decrease volume for ZONE SPEAKER B (Right) Increase volume for ZONE SPEAKER B

(Left) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to AM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to FM* (Left) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to XM* (Right) Set the band for the ZONE B tuner to SIRIUS*

(Left) Perform PRESET - for the ZONE B tuner* (Right) Perform PRESET + for the ZONE B tuner* (Left) Decrease the freqency for the ZONE B tuner* (Right) Increase the freqency for the ZONE B tuner*

(Left) REWIND* (Right) FAST FORWARD*

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

81

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

BASIC OPERATION

RC2001 BUTTON SETTINGS

The Wizz.it 3 editor software can be used to make the settings for the IR Command, LINK, JUMP, One Touch Operation (Macro) and other functions in the

CONNECTIONS SETUP

RC2001. This enables a customized user interface, optimized for the customer’s environment, to be built. The Wizz.it 3 editor software can be downloaded from www.marantz.com. For more information about the setting procedures, see the PC Editor Software Wizz.it 3 User Guide.

This is the basic operation procedure for the RC2001.

Press the Home button to enter Home mode f or

1.

the RC2001.

Select the devices that are set in Home mode.

2.

Perform operation of the device that you want

3.

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

to control in the selected device mode.

To control another device, return to Home

4.

mode and select another device.

The preinstalled default user ﬁ le is used to control Marantz products. The AV receiver device input switching code is assigned to the button next to the displayed device name of the device mode.

Example:

After DVD mode is selected in the remote controller, pressing the button next to DVD, shown in the ﬁ rst column in the LCD, transmits the AV receiver DVD input command.

SLEEP TIMER

The SLEEP TIMER is a function that sends a preset remote command after the sleep time has elapsed.

• The setting is made using the Wizz.it 3 editor, and the buttons that are assigned to the sleep timer are operated as shown below.

• This is a convenient function for devices that do not have a sleep timer or for setting the sleep timer using multiple devices.

• The RC2001 performs regular operation even when the sleep timer is activated.

Press the button that will be assigned to the

1.

sleep timer. The message “PROCEED?” is displayed on the LCD.

Each time the button is pressed, the sleep

2.

setting time changes in the cycle shown below.

PROCEED?

When the time that you want to set is displa yed,

3.

wait at the setting for three seconds.

• The sleep setting screen is no longer displayed on the LCD, and the sleep timer is automatically started.

And the sleep timer icon is displayed in Sub

Info area of the LCD.

• When the remaining time for the sleep timer setting is 10 minutes, the remaining time is displayed in the SubInfo area of the LCD.

SLEEP 30 SLEEP 60

SLEEP OFF SLEEP 120

SLEEP 90

MAIN MENU

The various settings for the remote device are made in the main menu.

ENTERING THE MAIN MENU

Press the Home button to enter Home mode for

1.

the RC2001.

Hold down the Home button and Menu button

2.

at the same time for three seconds to display MAIN MENU on the LCD.

1. LEARNING FUNCTION

Place the remote controller so that its infrared

1.

signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about 2 inchs (5 cm).

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

2.

RC2001, and then press the button next to the “LEARNING” indicator .

The screen appears as shown below. Either

3.

press the ENTER button or wait for three seconds.

TROUBLESHOOTING

DVD input command for Marantz AV Receiver.

OTHERS

82

SLEEP TIMER icon

ENGLISH

This screen changes to HOME mode. Press

4.

the button next to the displayed device name whose commands you want to learn.

Note:

In Home mode, learning cannot be performed with the SOFT button using the procedure shown below. Use the Wizz.it 3 editor to make any changes.

After selecting the device name, press the

5.

button whose command you want to learn.

This enters the learning standby mode.

6.

Press the remote controller button that you

want to have learn the command. Hold down the button until “LEARN OK” is displayed on the remote controller’s LCD.

Send the remote controller code that you want

to learn.

The remote controller has completed learning

7.

when “LEARN OK” is displayed on the LCD.

• Pressing the ENTER button enables you

to continue learning commands for another button in the same device mode.

• When the learning mode is completed,

press the Home button three times to return the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Notes:

• If learning could not be performed, “LEARN ERROR” is displayed on the LCD. Try performing steps 5 to 6 again.

• The RC2001 can learn up to a maximum of 1,000 remote controller codes. Once 1,000 codes are programmed for learning, “LEARNFULL” is displayed on the LCD, and learning can no longer be performed.

To perform further learning, use the Wizz.it 3 editor

to delete any unneeded learning codes.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

• When making the learning settings, the “LEARN ERROR” message may occasionally be displayed repeatedly on the LCD. In some cases, this can be due to transmission of a special remote controller signal code. Learning cannot be performed when a special remote controller signal code is used.

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

83

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

2. TIMER

FUNCTION

The timer function of the RC2001 can be used to send a preset remote controller command at a programmed time. The Wizz.it 3 editor can be used to operate multiple devices. One Touch Operation (Macro) can also use

CONNECTIONS SETUP

the timer function for transmission.

Checking the Settings

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

1.

RC2001, then press the button next to the “TIMER” indicator .

The TIMER menu is displayed. Pressing the

2.

button next to the “CHECK” indicator on the LCD displays the timer settings.

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

When the LCD appears as shown below, the

timer has not been set.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

Operation Settings

Press the button next to the “TIMER SET”

1.

indicator in the LCD in the TIMER menu screen to display the timer programming setting screen.

Use the numeric buttons (0 to 9) and cursor

2.

buttons (t and u) to set the time for the timer. After making the setting, press the ENTER button.

Home mode is shown in the LCD. Select the

3.

commands and devices for the commands that will be sent by timer programming.

• If a command assigned to the HARD button is to be sent by timer programming, press the HARD button when selecting the command to make the setting.

• If a command assigned to the SOFT button is to be sent by timer programming, use the < and > buttons when selecting the command to move the page, and select the command assigned to the SOFT button.

Press a button next to the “EVERYDAY” or

4.

“ONE TIME” indicators on the LCD to set timer operation to either everyday or one-time only operation.

• The timer settings are displayed. Check that the settings are correct.

Setup time

Device name

HARD or SOFT button

Key name

EVERYDAY or ONE TIME

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds so that “COMPLETED” is displayed on the LCD and the operation settings are automatically completed.

TROUBLESHOOTING

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return

OTHERS

to the MAIN menu.

• Pressing the Home button from the TIMER MENU screen returns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

84

Note:

The timer setting for the SOFT button cannot be used in Home mode.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the MAIN menu.

ENGLISH

Operation ON/OFF Settings

Press the button next to the “ON/OFF” indicator

1.

in the TIMER menu screen on the LCD to display the timer operation ON/OFF setting screen.

Press the button next to the “TIMER ON”

2.

(Enable) or “TIMER OFF” (Disable) indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable timer operation.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the MAIN menu.

• When timer operation is set to ON, the timer icon is displayed in the Sub Info area of the LCD.

24 TIMER icon

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

3.

seconds so that “COMPLETED” is displayed on the LCD and the operation settings are automatically completed.

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

85

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

3. SYS.SETUP

FUNCTION

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the RC2001, then press the button next to the “SYS.SETUP” indicator. The items below can be set in the SYS.SETUP screen.

CONNECTIONS SETUP

• CLOCK (Clock setting)

• BACK LIGHT (Backlight illumination time setting)

• LCD (LCD setting)

• BEEP (Beep sound setting)

• MEM CLEAR (Initialization setting)

OPERATION

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CLOCK (Clock setting)

This sets the clock for the RC2001.

Use the numeric buttons (0 to 9) and cursor

2.

buttons (t and u) to set the current time. After setting the correct time, press the ENTER button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed in

3.

the LCD to indicate that the clock setting is completed.

BACK LIGHT (Bac klight illumination time setting)

Press the LIGHT button on the RC2001 to turn on the backlight, then set the time until the backlight turns off.

Press the button next to the “BACKLIGHT”

1.

indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the backlight illumination time setting screen.

Press the buttons (right: +, left: -) displa yed ne xt

2.

to TIME to set the illumination time. The time can be set in 1-second intervals from 0 to 60 seconds.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed on

3.

the LCD to indicate that the illumination time setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

Setting the BACK LIGHT TIMER to 0 sec is equivalent to turning off the backlight so that the backlight does not turn on even when the LIGHT button is pressed.

Press the button next to the “CLOCK” indicator

1.

in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the clock setting screen.

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

86

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

Notes:

The clock can become out of sync over time. Please check it occasionally and set to the correct time if necessary.

The clock setting is not backed up when the battery pack is replaced. Please reset the time after replacing the battery pack.

ENGLISH

LCD (LCD setting)

Press the button next to the “LCD” indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD. The LCD setting menu is displayed.

• LCD TIMER (LCD timer setting)

This sets the time that the LCD remains on, after a button is pressed on the RC2001. When there are no operations and the LCD is turned off, this setting enables power consumption to be reduced and the life of the battery pack to be extended. The default setting is 10 seconds.

The LCD setting menu is displayed, and so

1.

press the button next to “LCD TIMER” in the LCD display.

Press the buttons (right: +, left: -) displayed

2.

next to TIME to set the display time. The time can be set in 1-second intervals from 10 to 60 seconds.

To leave the LCD always on, press the button

next to the “ALWAYS ON’ indicator. However, please note that this setting will shorten the life of the battery pack.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed on

3.

the LCD to indicate that the display time setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three

seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD

to the MAIN MENU.

Note:

If the LCD is turned off by the LCD timer, pressing any of the buttons on the remote controller will turn it on again. When the LCD is turned on, the pressed command is not activated.

To execute a command operation, press the button while the LCD is on.

• CONTRAST (LCD CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT)

This enables the LCD contrast to be adjusted. Adjust for maximum visibility according to your viewing environment.

The LCD setting menu is displayed, and so

1.

press the buttons next to “CONTRAST” in the LCD display.

Press the side buttons (right: +, left: -) to adjust

2.

the contrast level.

After deciding the settings, press the ENTER

button.

The message “COMPLETED” is displayed

on the LCD to indicate that the setting is completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

BEEP (Beep sound setting)

This sets the built-in beep sound in the RC2001.

Press the button next to the “BEEP” indicator

1.

in the SYS.SETUP menu screen in the LCD to display the beep setting screen.

Press the button next to the “ENABLE” or

2.

“DISABLE” indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable the beep sound.

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

3.

seconds so that “ENABLE” or “DISABLE” is displayed on the LCD and the settings are automatically completed.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS. SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

87

OTHERS

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

MEM CLEAR (Initialization setting)

FUNCTION

This returns the settings made in the RC2001 to their initial settings.

Press the button next to the “MEM CLEAR”

1.

indicator in the SYS.SETUP menu screen

CONNECTIONS SETUP

in the LCD to display the initialization setting screen.

Press the button next to the “NO” (Disable) or

2.

“YES” (Enable) indicators on the LCD to either enable or disable initialization.

OPERATION

BASIC

Pressing the NO button automatically returns

3.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

the LCD to the SYS.SETUP menu.

Pressing the YES button displays

“COMPLETED” on the LCD and completes initialization.

The setting items that are initialized are shown

below.

• TIMER SETUP

• BACK LIGHT TIMER

• LCD

• BEEP

TROUBLESHOOTING

Note:

The LEARNING and CLOCK settings are not initialized.

• Either press the ENTER button or wait three seconds for the LCD to automatically return to the SYS.SETUP menu.

• Pressing the Home button retur ns the LCD to the MAIN MENU.

4. STATUS INDICATOR

This displays the settings made in the MAIN MENU and the status of the remote device.

Checking the status

Display the MAIN MENU on the LCD of the

1.

RC2001, then press the button next to the “STATUS” indicator.

Pressing the ENTER button cycles through the

2.

statuses of each of the items below.

• Remaining learning memory

• Remaining macro steps

• LCD timer setting

• Backlight timer setting

• Beep setting

• Firmware version

• Current clock time

Either press the ENTER button or wait three

seconds so that the LCD returns to the MAIN MENU.

5. RESET

If the RC2001 is not operating properly, use the procedure below to perform a reset (restart). Performing a reset does not erase the settings in the RC2001.

Remove the battery case cover.

1.

Use a paper clip or other object to press the

2.

reset button in the reset hole as shown in the ﬁ gure below to reset the RC2001.

Note:

Perform the reset with the battery pack loaded.

6. PROGRAMMABLE CODES

Number of Programmable Codes

This remote control has Flash memory 4M bit (512KB) that enables it to program remote control signals include the learned codes for up to 8000 codes. This number is for Marantz remote control codes. The actual number of codes may be less than 8000 depending on the type of the programmed remote control signals.

OTHERS

88

Programmable Codes

This remote control may be unable to learn the codes for some A V equipment due to the code types, system, or other differences.

ENGLISH

GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC101 TO THE UNIT

The included remote controller can be used in zone systems. Using this remote controller , you can operate the unit through infrared receivers or the infrared receptor of Marantz products in multiple ZONEs.

Zone A Zone B Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily. SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO

Zone D (Main zone control)

POWER ON/OFF Turns on or off for main zone of the unit.

SOURCE

VOL +/–

MUTE Decreases the sound temporarily. SLEEP Sets the sleep timer function.

INFO

Turns on or off for each multi zone of the unit.

Selects a particular source component for each multi zone.

Adjusts the over all sound level for each multi zone.

Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for the multi zone.

Selects a particular source component for main zone.

Adjusts the over all sound level for Main zone.

Turns on or off the “On Screen Display” for the main zone.

CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS

1. Press the desired SOURCE button.

2. Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.

• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.

• It may not be possible to operate some models.

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TV (TV)

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TV on and off MENU/INPUT Select the TV video input CH3/4 Selects TV channel up or down ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in TV menu

– – – – – – –

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

89

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

CONNECTIONS SETUP

ENGLISH

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD Player on and off MENU/INPUT Select the DVD menu CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR)

OPERATION

2

BASIC

9 ;

§

∞

6 5

OPERATION

ADVANCED

DISC+/T.MODE DVD changer next disc (*) A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in DVD menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward chapter/track Skips to previous chapter/track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR DECK (VCR1/ VCR2)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR deck on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in VCR menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ SATELLITE BROADCASTING TUNER (DSS)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF

MENU/INPUT Select the satellite tuner menu

CH3/4

ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Turns the satellite broadcasting tuner on and off

Selects satellite tuner channel up or down

Moves the cursor for setting in SATELLITE Broadcasting TUNER menu

Play (*) Stop (*) PAUSE (*) – – Searchs forward (*) Searchs backward (*)

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TUNER (T1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Tuner on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down 4(CURSOR) Tunes a frequency station up and down 2(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down 1(CURSOR) Selects a preset station up and down 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE

A Selects AM mode B Selects FM mode C Selects XM mode D Selects DAB mode

Starts preset scan Stop preset scan – – – – – Selects the auto stereo mode or mono

mode

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

90

ENGLISH

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD)

• (*) RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this key.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Player on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) – 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE CD changer next disc (*) A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD Recorder on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) – 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE CDR changer next disc A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLONG A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the tape deck on and off MENU/INPUT – CH3/4 – ENTER –

3(CURSOR) – 4(CURSOR) – 2(CURSOR) – 1(CURSOR) – 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE – A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONTROLLING A MARANTZ UNIVERSAL DOCK (AUX1)

• RC101 dose not have the PRESET code library for this device.

SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the Universal Dock on and off MENU/INPUT Call up the menu CH3/4 – ENTER

3(CURSOR) 4(CURSOR) 2(CURSOR) 1(CURSOR) 2 9 ;

§

∞

6 5

DISC+/T.MODE Change the userinterface mode A Reserve for learinig B Reserve for learinig C Reserve for learinig D Reserve for learinig

Moves the cursor for setting in Universal dock menu

Play Stop Pause Skips to forward track Skips to previous track Searchs forward Searchs backward

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

91

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

FUNCTION

BASIC OPERATION

NORMAL MODE

(

When operating Marantz AV equipment products

This remote controller is preset with a total of 12 types of remote codes, including Marantz TV

CONNECTIONS SETUP

(television), DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), TUNER 1, TUNER 2, CD , CD-R, TAPE (tape deck), AUX1 and AUX2. Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You can use these products without setting any codes.

1. Press the SOURCE button.

For this example, press DVD. Pressing the SOURCE button once changes the remote control to the settings for the source that was pressed. To change the ampliﬁ er on other source, press the SOURCE button twice (double-click). The code is sent, and then the ampliﬁ er source

OPERATION

BASIC

changes to DVD.

SETTING THE BACK LIGHT

Each time press the buttons, illuminate button 2 seconds. To turn off back light, press and hold down the SET and 4 button until SEND indicator blinks twice.

OPERATION

ADVANCED

T o turn on it again, press and hold down the SET and ¢ button until SEND indicator blinks twice. Initial is back light ON.

PRESET MODE

(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment

CONTROLLER

products)

REMOTE

This remote controller is preset with remote control codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers. The preset codes are TV, DVD, CD and DSS. Settings can be made in one of two ways. When the preset codes are set, the following codes

TROUBLESHOOTING

are contained in the source button of the remote controller.

Importants:

• Some codes may be not match your equipment. In this case, you can use LEARN mode to store these

)

codes.

• The preset codes do not cover full functions. If you need extra function, use LEARN mode to

store extra function.

• When the batteries are getting weak, the preset procedure is not successful.

PROGRAMMING WITH THE 4-DIGIT CODE

1.

2.

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button (ex TV) for the appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinks twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 4-digit code by numeric keys for

appliance (code table at the end of this book) When the procedure is successful, the indicator will blink twice.

Note:

If the indicator did not blink twice, then repeat steps 1 through 2 and try entering the same code again.

SCANNING THE CODE TABLE

3.

5.

2.

3.

2.

SEND

4. Stop when the appliance turns off. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

5.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

CHECKING THE CODE

2.

4.

3.

1.

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice then back light ﬂ ashes.

Press the INFO button.

2.

The SEND indicator will blink twice.

T o view the code for ﬁ rst digit, press 1 once.

3.

Count the SEND indicator blinks (e.g. 3 blinks =

3) and write down the number.

Note:

If a code digit is “0”, the SEND indicator will not blink.

Repeat step 3 three more times for remaining

4.

digits. Use 2 for the second digit, 3 for the third digit, and 4 for the fourth digit.

1.

RESETTING THE CODE

2.

1.

2.

1. Press and hold down the SOURCE button for appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice.

Then back light ﬂ ashes.

Press the below codes to reset.

2.

TV : 1000 DVD : 2000 CD : 3000 DSS : 4000

The indicator will blink twice.

Note:

After this procedure, the selected SOURCE button is set initial code.

See the attached manufacturer number list for the preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and other settings.

Remote control source name

TV TV Television

OTHERS

DVD DVD DVD player CD CD CD player DSS SATELLITE Satellite broadcasting

Corresponding preset code

Device name

tuner equipment

92

1. Switch on the appliance which should be controlled.

Press and hold down the SOURCE button for

2.

appliance which should be controlled and press SET button until the SEND indicator blinking twice. Then back light ﬂ ashes.

Aim the remote controller at the appliance and

3.

alternately press the CH+ and buttons slowly.

SOURCE ON

ENGLISH

LEARN MODE

This remote controller is capable of learning and storing codes used by other remote controls that you already own. For codes which are not learned, the remote controller will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from the initial settings, or remote codes from another manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the customer. The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is located at the top of the remote controller.

Notes:

• This remote controller is capable to learn around 60 codes.

• When the batteries are getting weak , the learing procedure is not successful.

LEARNING PROCEDURE

1. Place the remote controller so that its infrared signal transmitter is facing the infrared signal receiver on the Marantz remote controller at a distance of about 2 inchs (5 cm).

2 inchs (5 cm)

SYSTEM REMOTE CO

NTROLLER

2. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/ INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

4. Select the button to be learned.

• LEARN indicator lights up.

When the following key learned

• SOURCE buttons

The lear ning function is unavailable for all

SOURCE buttons in any mode.

• POWER ON button

• POWER OFF button

• VOL +/- button

• MUTE button

• INFO button

• SLEEP button

The above keys are common use in each

device mode. It can be learned in TV mode.

Press and hold the button of the original remote

5.

controller to learn until the SEND indicator blinks twice.

• When the SEND indicator blinks once, repeat this step.

• When the memory of the RC101 is full, the LEARN and SEND indicators blink once. If you want to learn the code, you should erase other learned button.

Repeat steps 4 and 5 to learn other buttons in

6.

same SOURCE.

Repeat steps 3 to 6 to learn other SOURCE.

7.

When you have finished programming the

8.

remote controller, press the SET button, then LEARN indicator stops blinking and exits from the LEARN mode.

ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES (RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)

Codes can be erased in three ways: by buttons, sources, and by all memory contents.

Erasing the code by buttons

Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

1.

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Select the SOURCE button to select the button to be erased.

3. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and press the learned button twice to be erased.

• SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode

returns to LEARN mode.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET button.

Erasing the code by SOURCE

1. Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Erasing the all SOURCES

Press and hold down the SET and MENU/

1.

INPUT buttons until LEARN indicator blinks.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and press POWER ON and POWER OFF button.

• LEARN indicator lights.

3. Press ENTER button to continue erasing.

• The SEND indicator blinks twice and the

mode returns to LEARN mode.

• To cancel the erasing operation, do not

press ENTER button and simply touch any other button.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

3. Select the SOURCE button to select the SOURCE.

Notes:

• When the SEND indicator blinks once again, the transmitting code is unavailable for RC101, or the transmitting signal is intercepted by noise.

• If no buttons are pressed for approximately 1 minutes while in the LEARN mode, the remote controller automatically exits from the LEARN mode.

2. Press and hold down the SLEEP button and

press the learned SOURCE button twice to be erased.

• LEARN indicator lights.

4. To return the NORMAL mode, press the SET

button.

Note:

Erasing codes will return to the factory preset code, or there will leave empty if the button has no factory preset code.

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

93

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

CLONE MODE

FUNCTION

Creating copies using clone mode

All of the codes programmed to the RC101 remote controller can be copied to another RC101 using a few simple operations.

• The remote controller can copy the entire

CONNECTIONS SETUP

contents.

• When copying the entire contents, all programmed codes are copied.

Note:

The clone function can only be used for copying when using the same model (RC101) for both the transmitting and receiving remote controller.

Copying entire contents

1. Place the receiver sensor of the receiving

remote controller (top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the transmitting remote controller (top) at a distance of about 2 inchs (5 cm).

OPERATION

BASIC

2 inchs (5 cm)

OPERATION

ADVANCED

SYSTEM REM

O

TE CONT

ROLLER

2. Press SET button and PLAY button of the

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

transmitting remote controller until the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes The transmitting side is now ready.

3. Press SET button and STOP button of the

receiving remote controller until the LEARN indicator blinks twice.

4. Press the ENTER cursor button on the receiving

remote controller.

OTHER OPERATIONS

CHANGE THE CONTROL COMMANDS OF ZONE SPEAKER FUNCTION FROM ZONE.

CHANGE THE ZONE CONTROL COMMANDS FOR EACH ZONE

(When operating the unit by Multi Zone connected)

• Zone A (Default)

• Zone B

Then back lights tune off.

5. Press the ENTER cursor button on the

transmitting remote controller.

• Zone C (The unit does not use this zone.)

• Zone D (MAIN ZONE)

Change the control commands for each zone.

2.

1.

Then backlights tune off.

R

OLLE R

TE CONT

O M

6. When copying is started, the SEND indicator of

SYSTEM RE

transmitting remote controller and the LEARN indicator of receiving remote controller start to blink.

When the copying operation is completed, the

back lights of transmitting remote controller and receiving remote controller are turned on.

Do not touch either of the remote controls

during the copying operation. Doing so could cause copying to fail.

If the copying fails in the middle of the copying

process, back light of receiving remote are flash. Press the SET button to return the normal mode. Check and perform steps 1 to 5 again.

Copying takes about 30 seconds to complete

when the transmitting remote controller has been programmed to 100% capacity.

7. Once copying is completed, press the SET

button on both remote controls.

1. Press SET button and ZONE button until the

SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press each zone button(A/B button)

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of each zone.

POWER ON/OFF

SOURCE

VOL +/– MUTE

INFO

Tuner mode operation remote code (Refer to page

90)

SLEEP

1.

2.

1. Press SET button and POWER ON button until

the SEND indicator blinks twice.

Then backlight ﬂ ashes.

2. Press the 1-digit code by numeric keys.

• Zone mode: 1 (Default)

• Zone speaker mode: 2

Note

In case of Zone D, only control for main zone is possible.

3. Press ENTER button once to lock in the code.

When the procedure is successful, the SEND

indicator will blink twice.

These buttons change a special code of zone mode or zone speaker mode.

Note

The control commands can be set independently in ZONE A/B.

POWER ON/OFF

3.

1.

VOL +/– MUTE

Then backlight ﬂ ashes. The receiving side is now ready.

94

ENGLISH

SETUP CODES (RC101)

TV

Acer ...................................................................................1141

Admiral .........................................................1002, 1009, 1089

Aiko ................................................................................... 1059

Aiwa ......................................................................... 1117, 1118

Akai ................................................................................... 1001

Amtron .............................................................................. 1023

Anam .................................................................................1113

Anam National .............................................. 1023, 1069, 1092

AOC .....................................................1003, 1024, 1049, 1127

Audiovox ........................................................................... 1023

Bell & Howell ..........................................................1009, 1025

Benq ........................................................................1104, 1142

Broksonic .............................................1003, 1097, 1098, 1113

Celebrity ........................................................................... 1001

Citizen ........................................................... 1003, 1013, 1023

1026, 1059, 1063

Colortyme ............................................................... 1003, 1043

Contec ...............................................................................1113

Contec/Cony .................................................1023, 1045, 1047

Craig ....................................................1020, 1022, 1023, 1113

Crown ..................................................................... 1023, 1067

Curtis Mathes ...............................................1003, 1013, 1025

1026, 1062, 1103, 1110

Daewoo ..............................................1003, 1013, 1024, 1035

1036, 1059, 1084, 1101

Daytron ......................................................... 1003, 1013, 1016

Dimensia ..................................................................1103, 1110

Dumont ..........................................................1003, 1010, 1153

Electroband ...................................................................... 1001

Electrohome ........................................1001, 1003, 1069, 1133

Emerson ....................................................... 1003, 1013, 1015

1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 1025, 1038, 1044, 1045 1048, 1055, 1061, 1094 1096, 1099, 1101, 1113

Envision ............................................................................ 1003

Fisher ...................................................1025, 1051, 1091, 1160

Fujitsu ..................................................1038, 1124, 1125, 1155

Funai ..............................................................1023, 1038, 1113

Gateway ............................................................................1150

GE .....................................................1003, 1018, 1022, 1046

1054, 1069, 1085, 1103 1110, 1113, 1133, 1136, 1153

Goldstar ........................................................ 1003, 1013, 1024

1030, 1045, 1080  1100, 1112, 1154

Hallmark ........................................................................... 1003

Hisense ..............................................................................1116

Hitachi ................................................. 1003, 1012, 1031, 1032

1037, 1041, 1045, 1047 1065, 1068, 1082, 1088 1094, 1139, 1140, 1145, 1159

Inﬁ nity ............................................................................... 1067

Janeil .................................................................................1134

JBL ................................................................................... 1067

JC Penney .................................................... 1003, 1013, 1018

1019, 1024, 1026 1046, 1047, 1054 1063, 1083, 1085 1100, 1103, 1110 1112, 1133, 1154

Jensen .............................................................................. 1003

JVC ...............................................................1028, 1029, 1045

1047, 1050, 1060, 1065

Kawasho ................................................................. 1001, 1003

Kenwood ........................................................................... 1003

Kloss Novabeam .................................1023, 1056, 1057, 1134

KTV ............................................................... 1013, 1023, 1033

1034, 1073, 1099, 1113

LG ........................................................................... 1024, 1030

M.Wards ....................................................... 1002, 1009, 1038

Magnavox ..................................................... 1003, 1052, 1053

1056, 1057, 1063 1067, 1081, 1106

Marantz ................................................1003, 1031, 1067, 1122

Mitsubishi ...................................................... 1003, 1024, 1051

1115, 1122, 1133

Motorola .................................................................. 1014, 1069

NEC .......................................... 1003, 1012, 1024, 1043, 1069

NET-TV ....................................................................1137, 1150

Orion ....................................................................... 1020, 1096

Panasonic ..................................1017, 1067, 1069, 1095, 1111

Philips ..................................................1003, 1011, 1045, 1052

1054, 1056, 1057, 1058 1063, 1067, 1069, 1106

Pioneer ......................................................... 1003, 1018, 1037

1070, 1071, 1094 1145, 1147, 1149

Plasmsync .........................................................................1135

Portland .............................................. 1003, 1013, 1024, 1059

Price Club ......................................................................... 1026

Prism ................................................................................ 1018

Proscan ..............................................1004, 1005, 1006, 1007

1008, 1085, 1103, 1110

Proton ..................................................................... 1003, 1045

Quasar ....................................... 1010, 1069, 1073, 1111, 1153

Radio Shack ................................................. 1003, 1013, 1015

1023, 1024, 1025, 1045 1100, 1103, 1110, 1113

RCA .............................................................. 1003, 1004, 1005

1006, 1007, 1008 1014, 1024, 1049, 1069 1075, 1079, 1085, 1087 1088, 1093, 1094, 1101 1103, 1110, 1113, 1153

Realistic .............................................. 1013, 1015, 1023, 1025

1045, 1100, 1103, 1110

Runco ......................................................................1010, 1153

Sampo ...............................................................................1150

Samsung ............................................1003, 1013, 1024, 1026

1040, 1045, 1062, 1078 1083, 1090, 1100, 11051114 1120, 1121, 1146, 1148, 1157

Sansui ................................................................................1119

Sanyo .................................................1003, 1025, 1051, 1072

1077, 1091, 1156, 1157, 1158

Sharp ............................................................ 1003, 1013, 1014

1015, 1045, 1055, 1064 1066, 1076, 1089, 1123

Signature .......................................................................... 1009

Sony ..............................................................1001, 1102, 1108

Soundesign ................................1003, 1023, 1038, 1063, 1113

Starlite .............................................................................. 1023

Supre-Macy .......................................................................1134

Sylvania ........................................................ 1003, 1039, 1042

1052, 1053, 1056, 1057

1063, 1067, 1089, 1151

Symphonic ....................................................1023, 1039, 1044

Tandy ................................................................................ 1014

Tatung ............................................................................... 1069

Technics ............................................................................ 1018

Techwood ............................................................... 1003, 1018

Teknika ............................................... 1003, 1009, 1013, 1023

1024, 1026, 1038, 1045 1047, 1059, 1063, 1111, 1113

Telecaption ....................................................................... 1074

Toshiba .........................................................1003, 1019, 1025

1026, 1042, 1074, 1098 1107, 1111, 1135, 1136

Totevision .......................................................................... 1013

Universal ................................................................. 1046, 1054

Video Concepts .................................................................1113

Viewsonic ......................................................1006, 1022, 1109

1128, 1129, 1130, 1131 1138, 1143, 1145, 1150

Wards ........................................................... 1003, 1009, 1015

1024, 1038, 1044, 1046 1052, 1054, 1056, 1057 1067, 1086, 1103, 1110

White Westinghouse ................................................1001, 1101

Yamaha ..................................................................1003, 1024

Zenith ............................................................ 1003, 1009, 1010

1132, 1144, 1153

CD

AIWA ............................................................. 3001, 3002, 3003

AKAI .............................................................3004, 3005, 3006

AUDIO ............................................................................. 3007

AUDIO LABS .................................................................... 3008

CALIFORNIA .................................................................... 3008

CARVER ........................................................3010, 3011, 3009

CASIO .................................................................... 3012, 3020

CURTIS .................................................................. 3020, 3012

DENON ............................................................................. 3013

EMERSON ....................................................................... 3014

FISHER .....................................3011, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3018

GE .................................................................................... 3019

GENEXXA .................................................... 3014, 3021, 3020

HARMON ...................................................... 3022, 3023, 3051

HITACHI ...........................................................................3020

INKEL ............................................................................... 3024

JC PENNEY .................................................3012, 3020, 3025

JVC ......................................................................... 3026, 3027

KARDON ...................................................... 3022, 3051, 3023

KENWOOD ......................................... 3028, 3029, 3030, 3031

3032, 3033

KRELL .............................................................................. 3010

LUXMAN ............................................. 3035, 3036, 3037, 3038

LX I ............................................................... 3012, 3020, 3014

MAGNAVOX .................................................3010, 3039, 3040

MARANTZ .......................................... 3010, 3041, 3042, 3043

MATHES ................................................................. 3012, 3020

MCS ........................................................................ 3012, 3020

MGA ..................................................................................3023

MISSION .......................................................................... 3010

MITSUBISHI ........................................................... 3023, 3044

NAD ........................................................................ 3034, 3045

NAKAMICHI .................................................. 3046, 3047, 3048

NEC MCS ......................................................................... 3025

NIKKO .................................................................... 3007, 3016

ONKYO ............................................... 3049, 3050, 3051, 3052

3055, 3098

OPTIMUS ..................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3053

3054, 3056, 3057, 3058, 3059

PANASONIC ................................................. 3008, 3060, 3061

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

95

ENGLISH

NAMES AND

PHILIPS ..............................................3009, 3010, 3010, 3040

FUNCTION

PIONEER .................................3020, 3021, 3062, 3063, 3064

QUASAR .......................................................................... 3008

RCA ...........................................3011, 3014, 3065, 3066, 3067

3068, 3069

REALISTIC ..........................................3011, 3014, 3020, 3042

CONNECTIONS SETUP

3054, 3057

ROTEL .............................................................................. 3010

RS ORIGINAL ..................................................................3070

SAE ........................................................................ 3010, 3083

SAMSUNG ....................................................................... 3071

SANSUI .............................................. 3014, 3068, 3072, 3073

SANYO ......................................3011, 3018, 3074, 3075, 3076

SCOTT ............................................................................. 3014

SEARS .....................................3012, 3014, 3020, 3028, 3042

SHARP ......................................................... 3028, 3042, 3077

SHERWOOD ............................ 3042, 3056, 3070, 3078, 3024

SHURE ............................................................................. 3025

SONY .............................3039, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3097

SYLVANIA ......................................................................... 3010

OPERATION

SYMPHONIC .................................................................... 3083

BASIC

TEAC ........................................ 3016, 3042, 3057, 3083, 3084

3085, 3086

TECHNICA ............................... 3007, 3008, 3061, 3087, 3088

THETA DIGITAL ................................................................ 3040

TOSHIBA .......................................................................... 3045

OPERATION

ADVANCED

VICTOR ............................................................................ 3026

YAMAHA ................................... 3007, 3089, 3090, 3091, 3092

ZENITH ..................................... 3016, 3093, 3094, 3095, 3096

CONTROLLER

REMOTE

DVD

Aiwa ........................................................................ 2036, 2037

Apex ...............................2012, 2017, 2018, 2019, 2021, 2034

BOSE ...................................................................... 2038, 2039

Denon ..................................................................... 2047, 2048

Funai ................................................................................. 2049

GE ......................................................2009, 2020, 2029, 2033

Harman Kardon ................................................................ 2061

Hitachi ........................................................... 2008, 2012, 2031

JVC ...............................................................2006, 2010, 2040

2041, 2042, 2043

Kenwood ................................................................. 2053, 2054

Koss .................................................................................. 2058

Magnavox ............................................2007, 2011, 2023, 2025

Marantz ............................................................................. 2025

Mitsubishi .................................................................2011, 2015

Onkyo ............................................................................... 2062

Oritron ..................................................................... 2009, 2030

Panasonic ...........................................2003, 2015, 2016, 2055

Philips ............................................................2007, 2011, 2058

Pioneer ......................................................... 2002, 2014, 2056

Proscan ........................................................2009, 2020, 2032

RCA .......................................... 2005, 2009, 2020, 2035, 2057

Sampo .............................................................................. 2041

Samsung ..................................2008, 2012, 2022, 2024, 2027

Sanyo ..................................................................... 2050, 2052

Sharp ...................................................................... 2044, 2045

Sherwood ......................................................................... 2051

Sony .............................................................2001, 2013, 2059

Toshiba ...............................................2004, 2008, 2026, 2028

Yamaha ..................................................................2046, 2060

Zenith ................................................................................ 2010

DSS

Alphastar .......................................................................... 4027

BSB .................................................................................. 4021

Chaparral .......................................................................... 4039

DIRECTV ................................................................ 4001, 4016

DISH Network ...................................................................4030

Drake ................................................................................ 4026

Echostar ...................................4007, 4017, 4018, 4019, 4020

Express Vu ....................................................................... 4017

Fujitsu ............................................................................... 4025

GE ................................................................4002, 4008, 4009

General Instruments ............................................... 4036, 4037

Hitachi ..................................................................... 4001, 4015

Hughes ................................................................... 4001, 4016

Janeil ................................................................................ 4025

JVC ................................................................................... 4017

Mitsubishi .......................................................................... 4001

Panasonic ............................................................... 4004, 4010

Philips ..................................................................... 4031, 4035

Proscan ...............................................4002, 4008, 4009, 4011

Radio Shack ........................................................... 4036, 4037

RCA .................................................... 4002, 4008, 4009, 4029

Realistic ............................................................................ 4040

Rural Cable ....................................................................... 4036

Samsung ................................................................ 4022, 4027

Sony .............................................................4003, 4012, 4014

Star Choice .......................................................................4032

Star Trak ........................................................................... 4024

STS ................................................................................... 4038

SuperDish ......................................................................... 4028

Toshiba ................................................................... 4001, 4034

Uniden .......................................................... 4005, 4006, 4013

Video Pall .........................................................................4025

Zenith ...................................................................... 4025, 4033

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

96

ENGLISH

TROUBLESHOOTING

In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:

1. Are the connections made properly ?

2. Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?

3. Are the power ampliﬁ ers and speaker working properly ? If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.

If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

This unit cannot be turned up. The power plug is not connected.

No sound and picture are output even when power is on.

No speaker output. The headphones are connected to the

Incorrect Audio or Video for selected source.

Incorrect Audio from a channel.

No Audio output from the center channel speaker.

No Audio output from the surround speakers.

No Audio output from the surround back speakers.

Mute is on.

The input or power amp are not connected correctly.

The master volume control is turned all the way down.

The function selector position is wrong.

headphone jack.

Input cable connected incorrectly.

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

Center = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

STEREO has been selected for Surround mode.

Surround = NONE has been selected in SETUP mode.

The power amp and speakers are not connected correctly.

Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.

Surround back = NONE has been selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Connect the power plug to the outlet.

Cancel mute using the remote controller.

See the connection diagram and connect the cables correctly.

Adjust the master volume.

Select correct position.

Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not output sound when headphones are connected.)

Connect the cable correctly by referring to the connection diagram.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the center speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

When STEREO has been selected for Surround mode, no sound will be output from the surround speaker. Set another Surround mode.

Make the correct setting.

While referring to the connection diagram, connect the power amp and speakers to the correct channel.

Set surround mode EX/ES.

Make the correct setting.

SYMPTOM CAUSE REMEDY

Can not select EX/ES mode. Surround center= NONE has been

Can not select Pro Logic IIx mode.

Can not select Neo:6 mode. Input signal is incompatible.

Can not select CSII mode. Input signal is incompatible.

No output to Subwoofer Out. Subwoofer = NONE has been selected in

Noise is produced during DTSencoded CD or laser disc play.

A specific channel does not produce output.

FM or

AM reception fails.

Noise is heard during AM reception.

Noise is heard during FM reception.

Cannot get programmed station when the PRESET button is pressed.

Control with the remote controller fails.

Auto Setup (SPEAKER SETUP) is not working.

selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP

Input signal is incompatible.

SETUP mode.

Analog has been selected for input.

Nothing recorded on source.

Antenna connection is incomplete.

Reception is affected by other electrical ﬁ elds.

The radio waves from the broadcasting station are weak.

Preset data has been erased.

Batteries are consumed.

The remote controller mode is incorrect

The distance between this unit and the remote commander is too far.

Something is blocking the unit and the remote commander.

Headphones are connected.

Make the correct setting.

Use 5.1channel source.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Use 2 channel DTS input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input signal or analog input signal.

Select Subwoofer = YES.

Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital input, then play.

Check the encoded channel on the source side.

Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas to FM and AM antenna outlets.

Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna is set up.

Install an FM outdoor antenna.

Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time will erase preset data. If that happens, input the preset data again.

Replace all the batteries with new ones.

Switch the remote controller to the mode used for the component to be controlled.

Move closer to this unit.

Remove offending object.

Disconnect the headphones.

FUNCTION

NAMES AND

CONNECTIONSSETUP

BASIC

OPERATION

ADVANCED

OPERATION

REMOTE

CONTROLLER

TROUBLESHOOTING

OTHERS

97

Marantz AV8003 User Guide

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual